Home

L-INX 10X User`s Manual

Contents

1. Analog D atapoint Pod a Figure 81 Datapoint Manager Dialog Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 03 LOYTEC 7 2 1 Folder List Version 3 0 At the left is a list of folders which is used to sort the available data objects by their category There are a number of predefined folders available Import This folder has three sub folders The LNS Database Scan folder is used to hold data retrieved from a network database scan The CEA709 Network Scan folder holds NVs scanned online from an attached CEA 709 network The CSV Import folder is used to display data points imported from CSV files Data objects in the import folder are not stored on the device when the project is downloaded They represent data objects which are available on remote devices and are shown here as templates to create suitable data objects for use on the device by selecting the Use on Device option CEA709 Templates This folder contains the created data point templates They contain a set of properties which are applied to CEA709 data points when they are created on the LINX 10X LINX 10X This is the device folder of the LINX 10X It contains all the necessary data points which constitute to the LINX 10X s port interface definition These data points are created on the LINX 10X when the configuration is downloaded The three subfolders represent the CEA 709 port the System Regist
2. M 75 Dione CEA S32 SACS a E etaf 76 3 3 Enhanced Communications Test e a RA aa T Dodo CEA 09 SS TOTIS DIG Seer EE RE RR n ET She nu REEF NEN 78 SN Sy eN LCOS c 79 5 3 0 Scheduler SEatisucs PaO tes ait nade be coc sadnoteedanmibintenaitacdtebisasatunvesmapatioraiiabdes 80 I WAN Vea LOs Pap op crs caren saline c EDDIE UNS 80 X ME f eT NEUE 81 55 Reset Contact LOG Out T 81 EE BIER T Tt 82 OL CHAs7T09 OPC Serye Em 82 6 2 Data voli n 83 pe MG Uu o M T 83 0 2 2 Timis Parameters iso etit saith E dide id Mos 83 G22 3 Per Sene Wve cies Oc cd 84 G24 SVs Rer SETS oon ode ere ptt D d e oen edat ences 84 0 2 3 TISEP ROPISICTS con a saat EEUU UID E IUE 84 EPA NE IR OD EC T ETE T c T o T o S 85 GS ASE Peatures Oei n RE Sn nde 85 O Io ARNE eoim tot odores COO bu ub S roS Coon Eoo vi sut Ce S ute oto CORN Landed e ruat ds 85 6 5 2 cEIStotical Tata EOS sensoa Nancuteoasacvoondevbousanapeotanguimsergenterts 85 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 7 LOYTEC 0 5 9 3SCHOOUTIITIO erae E E 86 6 5 4 TIENNE ae reat ee eden eue Od p UA 87 o6 55 BSEC Io dtes ac ePre RU a Tree ter Tne Nel A MU EA DIL LEE 87 6 4 CHA 709 Technology 1 25 cick sesiccvissivvestiassecccebseuscasadsaseaaiteascestectcehaeeseusieiss 88 CAL CEA 709 Data PONTS 2 oleo er Dee cine DID RN ER EDT 88 6 4 2 Static Interfdce CTidlig
3. eeeeeeeesssssss 153 8 3 4 Using the Built In Configuration Servet ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 154 8 4 Firewall and NAT Router Configuration ecce eee eee eene eene eene nne 154 8 4 1 Automatic NAT Configuration sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenn nnn 154 8 4 2 Multiple IP 852 Devices behind a NAT Extended NAT Mode 155 8 4 3 Multiple IP 852 devices behind a NAT Classic Method 157 5 Multi Cast Configuration iui ies eec etoe repo pea n esa sese paa resa opo e ra nope tees 158 8 6 Remote LPA Operators oeoe eye Poeni esae fo songs Lev dU o evene eoa ee o adve 159 5 Internet Timing ASDGCGLIS uode HE dai oxe desee neice p eie oon Veg ee Taas 160 Suhel Channel Beso RR A E 160 8 2 Chianti De ldyovestunsxn sert telo veda sare a aeneo ce cado 160 8 7 3 Escrowing Timer Packet Reorder Timer eeeeeeeeeeeesss 161 o sk DNTP Taine SOLVE s eod e oit teat jean ose eielsiet eaa tee tien 161 8S Advanced Topics oic di oe rover deae bv cri ven rote ricus 161 Pu MER uin TE P c 161 8 0 2 MTS Athe BEIC Qa EOTIS eoe obooeethot sta a aane oues dede kt 161 5 5 5 Dynamic NAL ACCESS cec eel bod Sane esos Dean Orta tud etn 161 9 OPCO SeEV6OE 50 309 aa EHDI ITI RISCHIO IE IP IIIS 163 9 1 XMLDA ORC Server Suse vvec i e ivl eve vives ee evict FEERE EV Ld deve iets 163 Db NGGOSSAMELIOGS sererai miae o va aut raa ss
4. R P 127 Rel S BEI MESE NOT T TM 127 Toar VIVE Cer ea WAS ee c 128 TOA ALAC IMC DIES cocotte oria ioo te v do R oA te dieti 129 TOA Limit E Mail send Rate ives mete ne teta me mti UE eevee 130 7 9 Local Schedule and Calendar eee e eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee teet eeoo 130 FOI Created C inti O 130 TOS Create Calendar Pallet idee tet euiu reste PPAR Suo iR pU et tu tete eite cena 131 TOS Create a Local Sche dulets s Seo tese ore detete toten fosse Ute nea pe dates RUD e Sus 131 7 9 4 Configure Scheduled Data Points esee 132 129i dXoontieure Daily Schedules i viSuduiseou qu but Lond teens dida 133 1 926 Cuntieute Exec piOn Da yS 2 nocendi e n n DR en DD S pisci 135 JS Using tieLocalseledulet cun o de a R dons 136 7 9 8 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Schedulers ssssssssss 136 TO EIS rii 137 TAO A Create an Tan Ser Vets euet s eetbas ea actus oe pe dt ue ru De et A 137 TAO Create an Alarm CONCMION reads censtcmsncttentn eU epe enc d Roe ECRIRE eps uis 137 PAOD Deliver Alarms via EISE ooi dore pente a LODN Te HUN ebat oso cen as 139 I0 4 C reatean ATatm OS imistetao o a ERE ont dott Dou E ebore s DOSE Sue teneds 140 7 10 5 Limitations for CEA 709 Alarm Servers cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeees 141 pl ME ETIN Uer 141 TET C ieate qa OCA Oed sinet iot RE REN dies 141 PAA Contieure Trended Data Points oot ER e testet esie 14
5. ccccssssscscccccccccsssccssssssssssscsscecs 111 Job Stang as an NS Prus Tiinaa e PU scu Ud vas dopo onda 111 Tels Siort ne Stand POMC x osea desunt aav retuli en demon vaL eomm Order bd 111 7 7 3 Uploading the Configuration sese 112 7 7 4 Scanning for Network Variables ccccccccccccccccsssssseeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeneaas 113 7 7 5 Importing Network Variables ccccccccccccccccceeessseesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaas 114 7 7 6 Scanning NVs online from the Network eeeeeeeeeee 115 TO elect and Use Network V anaDIes o iot Io e Urano usd e pe eti tet lesus 117 J21 6 Change te NV ZATIOCGAPIOT uc ode toss Isis o DER Core deseiat iUm 117 CER CS Eri gt hr Mr cies aw teas i eataedeh tan deasiadasanae pap tnaseasaedebmonieua senses 118 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 8 LOYTEC Dial VOC TEAC E XTC I AILIN 119 JO WG re ave User RESISTI uius et aan eee ee 121 7 7 12 Configuration Download esses 122 7 7 13 Build XIF Tor Port Interface ee ee edet ERE Uere re ERE ruo eate eun 123 7 7 14 Enable Legacy NM Mode diti tr na sade tese eoe oer iens 123 7 7 15 Upload Dynamic NVs from Device necne 124 7 7 16 Working with Configuration Properties ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 124 LAT Upload thie System LOT oet botte t tasas Up ooeduyt bobus SE edet cha ibus Gooope ud 126 178 E Mail Templates E
6. IP 192 168 1 100 Configuration Server for L INX RET ance a IP 852 Channel Ethernet IP 192 168 1 101 IP 192 168 1 102 IP 192 168 1 1xx L IHX Road RR i T hha sti rt O E 2 Aa v CEA 852 Device CEA 852 Device CEA 852 Device Figure 130 The configuration server manages the devices on an IP 852 channel 8 3 2 Configuration Server Contacts IP 852 Device In this scenario the IP 852 device needs the following parameters set in order for the configuration server to contact the device The remaining parameters are retrieved from the configuration server e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 6 e Auto NAT or manual NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 6 e MDS5 secret if authentication is required see Section 4 7 If multiple IP 852 devices behind one NAT router are added the Auto NAT setting in the LINX 101 is recommended to be used with the LINX 101 configuration server 8 3 3 IP 852 Device Contacts Configuration Server Version 3 0 In this scenario the IP 852 device needs the following parameters set in order to contact the configuration server The remaining parameters are retrieved from the configuration server e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 6 e Auto NAT or manual NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 6
7. CEA 709 trend objects can generate trend logs for multiple data points and can be operated in one of three basic modes e Interval Mode In this mode a snapshot of all trended data points is logged into the data logger file e COV Mode In this mode each of the trended data points is logged separately if and only if its value changes For analog data points a specific COV increment can be configured in the data point configuration properties of the trended data point e Trigger Mode In this mode a snapshot of all trended data points is logged each time a trigger condition fires The trigger condition is applied to a trigger data point To Create a Trend Object 1 Under the port folder select the Trend sub folder to create a trend log object Elf CEA7U9 Port 71 Datapoints 0 Items ven Calendar 0 Items l se Scheduler D Items j A 1 Alarm 0 Items 2 Right click and select New Trend from the context menu 3 In the Create New Trend Object dialog shown in Figure 127 enter a name and optionally a description for the trend log object LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 142 LOYTEC Configure Trend Object E xj Properties Triggers Common Properties Mame fesmend 0 0 Description good description Trend Mode nera Fill Mode Rina Buffer Log Size 1000 items 16 63 kB Davs Hours Minutes Seconds Log Length 0 0 16 4n Log Interval Sec Fill Level
8. Remote Devices This folder is used to collect all remote calendars schedulers trend logs and alarm client objects which were created from network scan data For each remote device a subfolder will be created where the objects referencing this device are collected Global Objects This top level folder contains sub folders that organize specific application objects that operate on data points E Mail Configuration This folder contains E Mail templates An E Mail template defines the destination address and text body of an E Mail which is triggered by data points and may contain data point values or file attachments To create an E Mail template select the folder and use the context menu Alarm Log Configuration This folder contains the alarm log objects Each alarm log object creates a historical log of alarm transitions of one or more alarm objects alarm server or client To create an alarm log select the folder and use the context menu LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 94 LOYTEC e Math Objects Configuration This folder contains math objects Math objects are used to perform a pre defined calculation on a number of input data points are write the result to a defined set of output data points Each math object contains one formula To create a math object select the folder and use the context menu Using the context menu on a folder sub folders may be created to organize the available objects If new objects a
9. Add device Version 3 0 Select this menu item to add a CEA 852 device to the IP 852 channel A new menu appears as shown in Figure 35 CEA 852 Member Menu 1 IP Address lt unset gt 2 Port lt unset gt 3 NAT Address lt unset gt 4 Device name q Quit without saving x Exit and Save Figure 35 Add CEA 852 device Please enter the IP address and device name of the new CEA 852 device that should join the IP 852 channel If the port is different from the default port 1628 you must also enter the port address otherwise the default port address will be entered automatically If the device is behind a NAT router enter the local address in item 1 and the NAT routers LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 47 LOYTEC address in item 4 Do not forget to set up a port forwarding rule in the NAT router for the port specified in item 2 4 9 12 Option e Edit device Select this menu item to edit a CEA 852 device on the IP 852 channel The LINX 10X prompts the device number which shall be edited A list of available CEA 852 devices is displayed with the menu item 1 A new menu appears as shown in Figure 36 CEA 852 Member Menu 1 IP Address V 192 168 2 170 2 Port amp 1628 3 NAT Address lt unset gt 4 Device name s DC sSes q Quit without saving x Exit and Save Figure 36 Edit CEA 852 device in channel member list You can now change the IP address port NAT
10. Please enter the IP address for the LINX 10X the netmask e g 255 255 255 0 and the default gateway address 4 6 3 Option 5 Hostname 6 Domainname Hostname and Domainname are optional entries and can be left empty For some DHCP configurations it may be necessary to enter a hostname Please contact your system administrator to get information on how to configure DHCP to acquire an IP address 4 6 4 Option 7 DNS Servers Version 3 0 You can configure up to 3 Domain Name Servers You need to enter at least one IP address of a DNS server if you need DNS name resolution e g for sending E Mails see Section D213 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 4 LOYTEC 4 6 5 Option 9 4 6 6 Option 0 4 6 7 Option b MAC Address The LINX 10X comes configured with a unique MAC address This address can be changed in order to clone the MAC address of another device It can be dangerous to change the MAC address Please contact your system administrator to avoid MAC address conflicts After selecting menu item 9 the following message appears Override factory MAC address y n Enter y to input a new MAC address or enter n to clear the current MAC address and return to the factory default MAC address NTP Servers You can configure up to 2 NTP server Select lt O gt and when prompted Enter new address of NIP server 1 enter the first NTP server s IP address Press lt
11. 1 e High EU Double This is the analog maximum value of the data point e Low EU Double This is the analog minimum value of the data point e EU Units String This is the human readable engineering units text of the data point 9 1 2 2 Binary Binary data points are exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For each binary data point an OPC tag is created The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties e Item Canonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 11 Boolean e Item Value Boolean The present data point value e Item Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable e Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update e Item Access Rights Integer This property defines if the tag is read only or read write e tem Description String This is the description of the data point Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 166 LOYTEC e Contact Close Label String This property contains the active text of the binary data point e Contact Close Label String This property contains the inactive text of the binary data point 9 1 2 3 Multi state Multi state data points are exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For eac
12. 5 Hostname test linx101 6 Domainname lt unset gt 7 DNS Servers o pep dS d ee neue 9 MAC Address 00 0A B0 01 0A 4C factory default 0 NTP Servers unset out of sync b Link Speed amp Duplex Auto Detect q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 5 Enter basic IP settings Press x to save the IP settings and reset the LINX 10X with the main menu item 0 in order to let the new IP settings take effect Important The default IP address 192 168 1 254 is only set for configuration access It must be changed in order to make the device functional You should now be able to connect to the LINX 10X with an OPC XML DA client and add the LINX 101 s router to an IP 852 channel in the configuration server member list If the LINX 101 should also act as the configuration server please proceed to Section 4 9 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 19 LOYTEC 2 2 2 IP Configuration via the Web Interface Version 3 0 Optionally to using the console interface one can also use the Web interface to configure the client device In a Web browser enter the default IP address 192 168 1 254 of the LINX 10X Note that if your PC has an IP address in a subnet other than 192 168 1 xxx please open a command tool and enter the following route command to add a route to the LINX 10X To Add a Route to the Device 3 Windows START gt Run Enter cmd a
13. E Login Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Qo x A 15 JO sete She ravorten 2 62 2 o JB BD Adresse e http 192 168 24 99 webui config system j EJ wechseln zu Links amp Snagit E LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as operator Device Info Enter your username and password Account admin Password ecse Config Mal E Data Points m Scheduler Calendar Alarm s rar O WU D O C Un mA a p aun O z Jad D statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout are a internet eZ Figure 7 Enter admin as the default administrator password 6 The Config menu opens Click on IP in the Config menu and enter the IP address the IP netmask and IP gateway for this LINX 10X as shown in Figure 8 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 21 LOYTEC E Config IP Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Y X EJ X i E 2 D i Q Zur ck ix B A Pa Suchen Se Favoriten g LT Kee w L4 rel 3S Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webuijconfigyip EJ wechseln zu Links sna E t7 LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Enable DHCP E IP Address 21682499 IP Netmask 255 255 1920 IP Gateway h92168 11 Hostname testina Domainname NEN DNS Server 1 0101172 leave empty to disable DNS Server 2 leave empty to di
14. IP Address 3 IP Netmask 4 IP Gateway 40 4 6 3 Option 5 Hostname 6 Domainname sese 40 A G4 Opuoned DINS Servers eaves is eut etd abd d ates 40 465 Option oa WVIAC Addres epe nieto been A beens 41 A0 Option O NEP Servers n a soar sedeat rto t ieadoto teo 4 4 6 7 Option b Link Speed amp Duplex eeetibetetecuas sese dta ue 4 4 7 CEA 852 Device Configuration Menu eee eee e eee eee eene eene eee s sas tte ttoo 41 4 7 1 Option 2 Config server address 3 Config server port 42 4 7 2 Option 4 Contis client port soe erts pecu xe tos xeu pred ala de cca da 42 AD ODHOto Device naine oo it deed a E 42 4 134 Channel Mode eiie ERE A Et eus Vauban EU duse eee 42 4 7 5 SNTP server channel timeout ceeeeeseeeeee eene nennen rene 42 4 7 6 Option GA Escrow MEOW ocio eene eee 42 4 7 Option 7 Aggregation Timeout eessssssseeeeee ee 43 4 7 8 Option 8 MD5 authentication eeeeeeesssssssseseeeeeeeeene nnne 43 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 5 LOYTEC 4 n9 Opiom I MDS SECTE orpine Vitia uivent ante ie degleso t vhbt Vind Ubvent p IS Ug dee 43 4 0 Option 0 Location SINE eor e an tine setts tau tee as ecu ata 43 4 7 11 Option a NAT Address poeti e brc tie pro See ato RS dia ie 43 4 7 12 Option b Multicast Address cccccccccccc
15. L INX 10X LINX 10X Automation Server User s Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Contact LOYTEC Blumengasse 35 A 1170 Vienna AUSTRIA EUROPE support loytec com http www loytec com Version 3 0 Document No 88073002 LOYTEC MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU AND LOYTEC SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS PRODUCT IS NOT DESIGNED OR INTENDED FOR USE IN EQUIPMENT INTENDED FOR SURGICAL IMPLANT INTO THE BODY OR OTHER APPLICATIONS INTENDED TO SUPPORT OR SUSTAIN LIFE FOR USE IN FLIGHT CONTROL OR ENGINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT WITHIN AN AIRCRAFT OR FOR ANY OTHER APPLICATION IN WHICH IN THE FAILURE OF SUCH PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION IN WHICH PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of LOYTEC L Chip LC7093 L IP and L Gate are trademarks of LOYTEC electronics GmbH LonTalk LONWORKS Neuron LONMARK LonMaker i LON and LNS are trademarks of Echelon Corporation registered in the United States and other countries LINX 10X User s Manual 3 LOYTEC Contents T IBILrOGUCLOI uiri iR Eee aee Ere rae oe eripe einer ioo Ea eina 13 LI JONVGFVION Ie
16. L Veb Prajects 703 Model Mo Joo Set Auto Datapoint Configuration Remote Datapoints Datapoint Mame Filter Ta zl Imported NCC Datapoint Mame Remote Mw Remote Device l ce CEA708 CSN File Poe Datapoints 6 Items 1 Nw DOCVirtual_Functional_BlocknvoTempovoTemp SMVT temp DDC e CEA 703 LNS Scan 2 Out MV DDcVvirkual Functional BlacknviPowernviPower SMVT power F DOC j B CEA709 Network Scan 3 Out MV L Visvirbual Functional Blocknvian nviangle_F SMVT angle f L Vis m mo pum 4 In MV L VisVirEual Functional Blackrieaan nvoangle_F SMVT angle f L Vis i 7 System Registers 9 Items z Qut MV L Visvirtual Functional Blocknvicon nviconfig_sr SMVT canfig src L Vis ied J User Registers 0 Items 6 In Nw L Visvirtual Functional Blacknvoca nvoconfig_sr SMVT config src L Vis B5 CEAFO9 Port E Datapoints 0 Items be 8 Calendar 0 Items Scheduler D Items Bt D Alarm 0 Items A Trend 0 Items m B Statistics 18 Items Eed Datapoint Name NV DDCVittual Functional BlacknvaTemp 1 J Remote Devices sx Datapoint Description e Global Objecks be E Mail Configuration 0 Items lici Pollcycle s oo Lo E Math Object Configuration D Items itd Max Cache Age ms E Infinite iM m Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items nf Point Type Analog Datapoint nfl Direction a in Inl Ny Allocation Estemal NV nt Data Type Unsigned Long 16 bit unsigned integer
17. Remove Alarm Gondition Cancel Figure 125 Alarm Condition for a Binary Data Point 5 For a multi state data point the dialog as shown in Figure 126 appears Select the Alarm Server Optionally enter an Alarm Description If left empty the description of the data point is used Enter a Time Delay after which the condition is evaluated Select the Alarm States which triggers the alarm by clicking the arrow buttons Create Alarm Condition X W Enable Alarm Condition Alarm Server critical Alarm Description ventilation Alarm Time Delay s s Mot Alarmed Alarm on States STATE OFF STATE HIGH STATE MORPMAL Remove Alarm Gondition Cancel Figure 126 Alarm Condition for a Multi State Data Point 6 Click on Create In the alarm column the alarm sign will be added for those data points that have an alarm condition 7 10 3 Deliver Alarms via E Mail Updates in the alarm summary of an alarm object can be used as a trigger to send E Mail For setting up E Mails the account information has to be configured on the device e g on the Web UI see Section 5 2 13 Then an E Mail template can be created and the alarm point attached as a trigger Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 140 LOYTEC To Create an E Mail Template for Alarms L 2 6 7 Create or configure an E Mail template as described in Section 7 8 1 Change to the Mail Triggers tab Click the Add button a
18. lint Unit Text degrees Celsius DLOYTEC Configurator ready a Figure 104 Imported NVs 4 Now the CSV File folder is populated with the imported NVs as shown in Figure 104 The list can be sorted by each column Selecting a line will display a number of associated properties in the property view below Multiple items can be selected by using the Ctrl key and clicking with the mouse All items can be selected by pressing lt Ctrl A gt 7 7 6 Scanning NVs online from the Network LINX 10X devices also support an online network scan on the CEA 709 network In this scan the devices searches for other devices on the CEA 709 network and pulls in NV information of these devices These NVs can then be used instead of importing them from a CSV file Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 116 LOYTEC To scan NV online of the CEA 709 network 1 Click on the Datapoints tab File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web ji Dg pe blipe r Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem 1 linx Channel FT 10 Statistics L w eb Projects 2 Select the folder CEA709 Network Scan 2 Datapoint Configuration 2 1 J Imported 2 CEA709 CSV File j E CEA702 LNS Sca 3 4 Right click on that folder and select Scan CEA709 852 Network This opens the CEA709 852 Network Scan dialog as shown in Figure 105 x Device List L Gate FT 10 BOOO00045356 g000d74600810401 1 Node fe37ce433e78
19. 273 300000 normal T d Datapoints NY tn20Controller_ 1nvi 1temp output analog invalid value alate U Calendar NY tn20Controller 1nvoO2lux input analog 7 000000 normal O Scheduler NY tn20Controller 1nvil 3lux output analog invalid value rem N tn20Controller 1nvoD4lev percent input analog 0 700000 normal a NY tn20Controller 1nviD5lev percent output analog invalid value mC Trend N tn20Controller 1nvo b5temp f input analog 0 700000 normal Uu Statistics NV tn20Controller 1nviQ7temp f output analog invalid value x Remote Devices CEA709 Port Statistics aC O Elapsed Time input analog 96 000000 normal Average Packet Rate input analog 3 000000 normal Data Points lt Bandwidth Utilization input analog 0 000000 normal B Scheduler Max Bandwidth Utilization input analog 36 400000 normal pls D CRC Error Rate input analog 0 000000 normal B Alarm Max CRC Error Rate input analog 0 000000 normal eT CRC Errors input analog 0 000000 normal vs Missed Packet Rate input analog 0 000000 normal statistics Max Missed Packet Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Missed Packets input analog 0 000000 normal L Web Packet Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Max Packet Rate input analog 70 000000 normal Packets input analog 268 000000 normal Reset Missed Preambles Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Max Missed Preambles Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Contact Missed Preambles input analog 0 000000 normal Chann
20. Choose y to enable automatic NAT router discovery To manually enter a NAT address choose n and enter the NAT address when requested to do so To completely disable the NAT router support choose n and enter the IP address 0 0 0 0 when requested to enter the NAT address If an LINX 10X uses automatic NAT router discovery and the NAT address is known beforehand the LINX 10X can simply be added to the channel in the L IP configuration server by specifying the NAT address and correct port If the NAT address is not known take the following steps to add the LINX 10X to a CEA 852 IP channel in the configuration server 1 On the LINX 10X turn on automatic NAT router discovery this is the default setting The NAT address should read Auto no NAT 2 Enter the IP address of the configuration server in the CEA 852 device configuration menu Exit and save but do not reboot 3 Go back to the main menu Wait 15 seconds 4 Go to the IP configuration menu The NAT address should show the public IP address of the NAT router or firewall e g Auto 198 18 76 1 5 On the configuration server add the LINX 10X to the configuration server using this IP address Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 44 LOYTEC 4 7 12 Option b Multicast Address This menu option allows the user to add the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X into a multi cast group for the CEA 852 IP channel Enter the channel s IP mu
21. IP to learn more about the current transceiver settings LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 63 LOYTEC 4 CEA 709 Configuration Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 1Bl x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Ld aurick X T ix E A ye Suchen Se Favoriten 4 od s w L4 rel X Adresse e http 192 168 24 98 webui config ldi Wechseln zu Links gt amp Snagit E n DLOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin Port Config CEA709 P Port Configuration cEA 709 Save Settings Get Settings Device Info Config Passwords W Backup Restore m CEA 709 E Mail Data Points B Scheduler Calendar Alarm Statistics networks under control L Web Reset Contact Logout zi E a interne ZA Figure 57 CEA 709 Configuration Page 5 2 5 CEA 709 Router Configuration Version 3 0 This page is only available on the LINX 101 The CEA 709 router configuration page allows configuring the built in router mode Available modes are Configured Router and Smart Switch The LINX 101 must be rebooted to let the changes on this page take effect The configured router mode is the default setting Choose this setting if you want to use the LINX 101 as a standard configured CEA 709 router that can be configured in a network management tool such as NL 200 or LonMaker The Smart Switch mode lets the device act as a self learning router like t
22. LINX 101 keeps track and modifies its forwarding tables accordingly All messages with a destination subnet node address not yet learned are forwarded The router supports group learning Groups can span multiple router ports Group learning only works for messages using acknowledged or request response service All messages with a destination group address not yet learned are forwarded The router has no learning strategy for broadcast addresses As a result all subnet or domain wide broadcasts are always forwarded If subnet wide broadcasts shall not be forwarded please use the smart switch operating mode without subnet broadcast forwarding see Section 8 1 4 The router has no learning strategy for unique node ID addresses Node ID addressed messages are always forwarded This operating mode uses the channel routing strategy on the IP channel to distribute IP packets It uses flooding to send all packets on the IP channel to all IP devices on this IP channel The advantage of this operating mode is that it is fully plug amp play and no router configuration is required The disadvantage is that this operating mode doesn t scale very well with larger networks We do not recommend this operating mode for IP channels with LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 151 LOYTEC more than 10 IP 852 devices and packet rates of more than 500 packets s Please use the configured router mode from Section 8 1 1 for larger IP channel conf
23. OPC tags The LINX 10X also supports the LOYTEC Alarming Trending and Scheduling AST feature set The device provides LonMark scheduler calendar objects which can directly schedule NVs or registers For alarm conditions the LINX 10X can be configured to send E Mails to pre defined addresses Alarms can be also stored in a historical alarm log There can be up to 100 trend log objects with an aggregated total log buffer size of 2MB Finally the LINX 10X provide mathematics objects which can be used to combine data points using a mathematical formula The AST objects are exposed to a set of OPC tags Trend logs can be uploaded from the device in CSV format In addition a dedicated Web service can be used to access trend log information LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 14 LOYTEC Version 3 0 Like the L Switch the LINX 10X permanently collects statistics information from the attached network channels channel load CRC errors forwarding statistics etc Using this data the LINX 10X software is able to detect problems on these channels overload connections problems etc and warns the system operator via LEDs see Section 3 4 10 An intuitive user interface allows fast and easy network troubleshooting without any additional analysis tools and deep system knowledge The LSD Tool can be used for a more detailed view of the collected statistics data See Section 14 1 for more information on this powerful system diagnostics
24. Reset Contact Logout l ooo Figure 51 Enter admin as the default administrator password The Config menu opens Click on Passwords in the Config menu which opens the password configuration page as shown in Figure 52 The LINX 10X has three user accounts 1 guest allows the user to view certain information only e g the device info page By default the guest user has no password 2 operator in opposite to the guest the operator is able to read more sensible information such as calendar data 3 admin has full access to the LINX 10X and can make changes to its configuration Note that the user accounts are also used to log on to the FTP and Telnet server LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 58 LOYTEC E Config Passwords Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Oj x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ay 3 a Il T aurick y T ix B A Suchen Se Favoriten 4 Val re Ww L4 rel X Adresse E http 192 168 24 98 webuifconfig passwords Wechseln zu Links sat Fal r DLOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin Enter the desired password for the Administrator and Guest accounts The Administrator has full access to the device whereas a Guest can only view the status information but not change the configuration In order to clear a password leave the password field empty Account admin New password mmm Retype password essel Device Info
25. Table 9 summarizes the timing values that must be set when operating the LINX 101 under WAN conditions Channel Timeout Average ping delay Aggregation Timeout Escrowing Packet The smaller value of 0 25 Channel Timeout or 64ms Reorder Timer Aggregation Timeout Typically 16 ms Packet Bunching Channel Delay in Average ping delay 10 2 Aggregation Timeout LonMaker Table 9 Advanced IP 852 timing parameters Please use a PC to determine the average ping delay between the different LINX 101s in the network If multiple LINX 101s are communicating with each other always use the largest measured average ping delay for the input value for the calculations in Table 9 Escrowing should be disabled in a LAN 0 ms The Channel Delay in LonMaker should be set to 2 Aggregation Timeout in a LAN if MD S is disabled In LANs Channel Timeout is only required if MD5 authentication is enabled Set Channel Timeout to 200 ms and Channel Delay to 20 ms 8 7 1 Channel Timeout The Channel Timeout is a property of the CN IP channel If a packet travels across this CN IP channel for longer than what is specified in Channel Timeout in ms the packet is discarded The LINX 101s always needs to synchronize with a SNTP timeserver when a Channel Timeout is set other than 0 ms Channel Timeout is highly recommended if MD5 authentication is enabled in order to prevent replay Set Channel Timeout to 200 ms and Channel Delay to 20 ms in a LAN environ
26. The logHandle must be used with the proprietary Data Log Web service e CsvFile string read only const This tag specifies the file path and file name of the CSV data log file e CentralDLO CentralDL1 string read write These tags serve as placeholders for the central data logger to store its URI The tag CentralDLO is intended for the primary CentralDL for the secondary central data logger The tags are stores in non volatile memory and retain their values over a power on reset 9 1 3 5 E Mail Templates E Mail templates can be configured in the LINX 10X Configurator software When an E Mail template is triggered the corresponding E Mail is transmitted The E Mail template can also be triggered over the OPC interface Therefore a node is added to the OPC name space for each E Mail template under the E Mail node Each E Mail node is named after the E Mail template and contains the following OPC tags e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains email It identifies this folder as an E Mail template folder e Send boolean read write When writing TRUE to this tag the E Mail transmission is triggered 9 2 Using L Web Version 3 0 The L Web is a Web based visualization software that comes free with the LINX 10X It uses the standard Web technologies to visualize and control data provided by one or more LINX 100 or LINX 200 Automation Servers on a Windows PC
27. Use ID 1 nut Eemp 26 50 Qu out temp Trend Object 107C Figure 128 UID of data points Because the contents are generated on the fly the file size in the FTP client will appear as 0 Bytes The decimal point and CSV column separator can be configured over in the system configuration of the Web UI see Section 5 2 1 of the LINX 10X Note that for a comma as the separator the decimal point is a point This is useful for English U S applications For countries that use the comma as the decimal point select the semicolon as the CSV separator 7 11 5 Deliver Trend Data via E Mail Version 3 0 Trend logs can be downloaded from the device via FTP This requires an active action by the user Alternatively trend data can be sent as an E Mail attachment For doing that an E Mail template has to be set up for the trend log to be transmitted The fill level condition in the trend object can be used as a trigger to send an E Mail with the trend s data logger CSV file as an attachment For setting up E Mails the account information has to be configured on the device e g on the Web UI see Section 5 2 13 Then an E Mail template can be created and the trend object attached as a trigger To Create an E Mail Template for Trends 1 Create or configure an E Mail template as described in Section 7 8 1 2 Change to the Mail Triggers tab 3 Click the Add button and select a trend object LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X Use
28. Wechseln zu Links xi Norton AntiVirus T ex DLOYTEC Logged in as Administrator Device Info aa c Add Device Reload Recontact Action on Selected Execute O WU No Name IP Address Stat Flags QU local 192 168 1 253 1628 I Edit NAT Router 192 158 1 250 Edit 1 pen 10 0 2 2 1528 I Eait Stats Iv EE 2 2 lip n2 10 0 2 3 1531 Edit Stats Iv asswords Umm m Backup oO 3 pes 192 168 1 37 1628 I Eait Stats E gt Statisti e alistics ET X unregistered notcontacted wv registered notresponding 9 no ext NAT disabled Reset Contact Logout l E Fertig m Imi m 4 a Lokales Intranet Figure 61 CEA 852 channel membership list The device status information is indicated with descriptive icons of different colors The description for the different status indicators is shown in Table 7 The Flags column indicates with an A that the device is an auto member Click on the Edit button to change the device name IP address or port number for this device Click Edit on a NAT router to change the NAT router address The Stats button retrieves the statistics summary page from the client device eme m0 w registered The CEA 852 device has been successfully registered with the IP 852 channel and is fully functional unregistered The CEA 852 device has never been registered with the IP 852 channel not contacted The CEA 852 device has not been contacted since the configuratio
29. bindings are necessary for external NVs For input data points using external NVs however a pollcycle must be configured If not configured explicitly a default pollcycle of 10 sec is chosen The default pollcycle can be changed in the project settings menu Based on the NV the data point is derived the following kinds of data points are created e Simple NVs that hold only one scalar value e g SNVT amp Those kinds on NVs are represented as analog data points The data points holds the current value scaling factors are already applied LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 89 LOYTEC e Simple NVs based on an enumeration e g SNVT_date_day Enumeration types result in multistate data points They represent the state of the NV e Structured NVs that consists of a number of fields e g SNVT_switch All structured NVs are represented as user point That is the data point is structured similar the NV it is based on Beneath the user data point the individual structure fields are presented as sub data points For more information on the different types of network variables and their implications please refer to the application note in Section 14 2 For CPs the allocation type File is used 6 4 2 Static Interface Changes Version 3 0 The LINX 10X can be configured to use static NVs Unlike dynamic NVs static NVs cannot be created in the network management tool They are part of the static interface and are usuall
30. 10X Select LINX 10x_FT 10 if the LINX 10X is configured to use the FT 10 interface or LINX 10x_IP 10L if the LINX 10X is configured to be on the IP channel For information on how to configure which port to use refer to Section 4 5 for the console UI or Section 5 2 4 for the Web UI 4 Select the channel which the LINX 10X 1s connected to and click Next 5 In the following dialog shown in Figure 91 appears Click Next Mew Device Wizard E xj Device name lin Location Fing Interval LIS BO0S00000000 Never X Description Zur ck Finish Abbrechen Hilfe Figure 91 Leave defaults for Location 6 Check Service Pin as the device identification method as shown in Figure 92 and click Next Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 107 LOYTEC New Device Wizard Figure 92 Use Service Pin 7 Click Next in the following screens until you get to the final dialog shown in Figure 93 8 If the device is already on net select Online New Device Wizard Figure 93 Final dialog 9 Click Finish A dialog will prompt to press the service pin Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 108 LOYTEC Echelon LonMaker E Please press the service pin on device linx Options Display data from service pin Total Received v Filter on program ID Filter on channel Channel FT 10 Figure 94 The LINX 10X has been added to the dra
31. 1630 registered 003 sony 80 168 1 135 1628 registered 004 lip2 80 168 1 251 1628 disabled X 005 lpa ip 80 168 1 215 1628 registered A Press lt RETURN gt to continue Figure 37 List all IP 852 channel members LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 48 LOYTEC The list shows the list entry number the device name the IP address and the current status of this device Note that the first entry is always the local device which the CEA 852 device is built into the configuration server Devices behind a NAT router are listed in a tree view style The A flag indicates that this device is an auto member The X flag indicates that the device got disabled because it does not support the extended NAT mode e g pre 3 0 L IP or i LON 1000 If the channel mode falls back to standard these devices are enabled again 4 9 17 Option r Recontact devices amp list channel members Select this menu item to contact all CEA 852 devices on the IP 852 channel and watch the state of the individual CEA 852 devices This menu item can also be used when a CEA 852 device e g LINX 101 is replaced and the CEA 852 configuration must be propagated to the new device without deleting the device in the configuration server and adding the device again This menu item can also be used to remove all auto members from the configuration server that are no longer responding see 4 9 7 4 10 Reset configuration load factory defaults This menu item
32. 193 TOL LINA 11 C C UR RU 193 I6 L E Physical SpectHcalOLls scenes set th Onde ute eei aM dU tus 193 IG L 2 ReSoutce DInits oos uito be E oett oed eioeuteitces I retos Mri sd uiuit 193 Ia oiii eT 195 I5 Revision History 5n ihe Die iore eee aa 196 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 11 LOYTEC Version 3 0 Abbreviations LOOBaSe T onto 100 Mbps Ethernet network with RJ 45 plug INS COTES AUON inii dictse Collection of several CEA 709 packets into a single CEA 852 packet BOOTP esse esi edu Bootstrap Protocol RFC 1497 AS Doae itera tides Alarming Scheduling Trending e o RIPE hia Configuration Client also known as CN IP Device CEA TOS aerae ent Protocol standard for LONWORKS networks CEAI oeste Protocol standard for tunneling CEA 709 packets over IP channels E EOE AEEA E Control Network CNIP nuena Control Network over IP CN IP Channel logical IP channels that tunnels CEA 709 packets according CEA 852 CINAIPDaCKOL quier ttesoes IP packet that tunnels one or multiple CEA 709 packet s CONV adc anaes at change of value CR uud pdt etie Channel Routing QU p rc Configuration Server that manages CEA 852 IP devices by EA Data Access DHCP spetta tees Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 RFC 2132 IONS S icc cio abet iie Domain Name Server RFC 1034 D Sd rece Daylight Saving Time GM Diaeta duae Greenwich Mean Time ED A EE EN T e Internet Protocol LSD TOOb ceti LOYTEC System Diagnostics Tool
33. 5 Reply e mail address opt lt unset gt 6 E Mail server user name no authentication E Mail server password gt lt unset gt 9 SMTP debug output FOLT 0 Send test e mail q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 23 E Mail Account Configuration Menu For testing the e mail setup enter lt 0 gt to send a test e mail For debugging delivery problems turn on logging information by selecting lt 9 gt The e mail transmission log is then output to the console 4 5 CEA 709 Configuration Menu This menu allows changing the settings of the CEA 709 port of the LINX 10X The menus differ between the LINX 100 and the LINX 101 On the LINX 100 the menu looks like shown in Figure 24 CEA 709 Configuration Menu 0 Port configuration CEA 709 CEA 709 FT 10 IP TPe852 inactive q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 24 CEA 709 Configuration Menu on the LINX 100 The menu in the LINX 101 contains also the router and has both ports always active See the depicted example in Figure 25 CEA 709 Configuration Menu CEA 709 FT 10 IP IP 852 r Router configuration Configured Router q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 25 CEA 709 Configuration Menu on the LINX 101 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 38 LOYTEC 4 5 1 Option 0 Port configuration This menu item allows config
34. 5 Reset Contact Logout The menu item Reset allows two essential operations e Rebooting the LINX 10X from a remote location and e Resetting the data point configuration from a remote location see also Section 4 10 3 This option clears all data points and the entire port configuration It leaves the IP settings intact The Contact item provides contact information and a link to the latest user manual and the latest firmware version The Logout item closes the current session Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 92 LOYTEC 6 Concepts 6 1 CEA 709 OPC Server Version 3 0 The LINX 10X implements an embedded OPC server which exposes network variables NVs and configuration properties CPs from the CEA 709 network to OPC The OPC server is based on OPC XML DA Web service The LINX 10X has one physical FT port and one IP 852 port which is accessible over Ethernet On the LINX 100 the OPC server node is internally connected either to the FT port or to the IP 852 port Which one is used can be configured in the CEA 709 configuration see Section 5 2 4 The schematic is shown in Figure 76 a If configured for the FT channel the LINX 100 provides an RNI for remote access to the FT channel The RNI can be used to commission nodes and trouble shoot communications on the FT channel The LINX 101 possesses a CEA 709 router which connects the FT port and the IP 852 port On the LINX 101 the OPC server node is a
35. 6 3 2 Historical Alarm Log Version 3 0 The alarm summary of the alarm objects contains a live list of currently active and acknowledge pending alarms As soon as an alarm becomes inactive and has been acknowledged it disappears from the alarm summary To store a historical log of alarm transitions an alarm log is utilized An alarm log can log transitions of one or more alarm objects The alarm log is always local and stored as a file on the device The size of an alarm log is configurable The alarm log operates as a ring buffer As soon as its size limit is reached the oldest alarm log records are overwritten by newer alarm transitions The alarm log is available on the Web UI or can be uploaded from the device as a CSV file The CSV file can also be used as an E Mail attachment LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 86 LOYTEC 6 3 3 Scheduling Schedulers are objects that schedule values of data points on a timely basis A scheduler object is configured by which data points it shall schedule This configuration is done by the system engineer once when the system is designed The configuration of the times and values that shall be scheduled is not part of that initial configuration and may be changed later This distinction has to be kept in mind A scheduler object sets its data points to pre defined values at specified times The function of the scheduler is state based This means that after a given time the scheduler main
36. CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X 4 7 8 Option 8 MD5 authentication This menu item enables or disables MD5 authentication Note that MD5 authentication cannot be used together with the i LON 1000 since the i LON 1000 is not fully compliant with the CEA 852 authentication method MD5 can be used with the i LON 600 4 7 9 Option 9 MD5 secret Enter the 16 byte MD5 secret Note that for security purposes the active MDS secret is not displayed You may enter the 16 bytes as one string or with spaces between each byte E g 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC DD EE FF 4 7 10 Option 0 Location string Enter a location string with a maximum length of 255 characters This is optional and for informational purposes only 4 7 11 Option a NAT Address If the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X is used behind a NAT router the public IP address of the NAT router or firewall must be known This address can either be entered manually or can be determined automatically Automatic NAT router discovery allows to operate the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X behind a NAT router or firewall which has a dynamic public IP address and determines the correct NAT address from an L IP CS This is the default setting Enable automatic NAT router discovery y n Figure 32 Enable Disable automatic NAT Router Discovery To enable disable automatic NAT router discovery select this menu option The question in Figure 32 will be prompted on the console
37. CEA 852 devices can add themselves to the channel without knowledge of the system operator This could cause a potential security hole Roaming members support This menu item allows tracking CEA 852 devices when their IP address changes This feature must be turned on if DHCP is used and the DHCP server can assign different IP addresses to the same device same Neuron ID In combination with Auto NAT LINX 101s can also be operated behind NAT routers which change their IP address between connection setups For more information on this topic refer to Section 8 4 1 The roaming member feature is turned on by default It is recommended to turn off this feature if DHCP is not used or if the DHCP server always assigns the same IP address to a given MAC address MD5 authentication This menu item allows enabling and disabling MDS authentication If MD5 authentication is enabled all devices on the IP 852 channel must have MD5 enabled and must use the same secret Note that MD5 authentication cannot be used together with the i LON 1000 since the i LON 1000 is not fully compliant with the CEA 852 authentication method MD5 can be used with the i LON 600 4 9 10 Option 0 MD5 secret Enter the 16 byte MDS secret Note that for security purposes the currently set MD5 secret is not displayed You may enter the 16 bytes as one string or with spaces between each byte E g 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC DD EE FF 4 9 11 Option a
38. Config E System IP Passwords m Backup Restore E CEA 709 E E M Data Points B Scheduler Calendar Alarm Change password Statistics networks under control L Web Reset Contact Logout zu Loma 7 Figure 52 Password Configuration Screen Please change the administrator password in order to protect yourself from unwanted configuration changes by anyone else To do so select the admin account in the drop down box and enter the new password If the administrator password is left empty password protection is turned off and everyone can access the LINX 10X without entering a password Click on Change password to activate the change 5 2 Device Configuration The device configuration pages allow viewing and changing the device settings of the LINX 10X Here are some general rules for setting IP addresses port numbers and time values e Anempty IP address field disables the entry e An empty port number field sets the default port number e Anempty time value field disables the time setting 5 2 1 System Configuration Version 3 0 The system configuration page is shown in Figure 53 This page allows to configure the LINX 10X s system time The time sync source can be set to auto manual NTP LONMARK In the auto mode the device switches to the first external time source that is discovered The option manual allows setting the time manually in the fields
39. Contact Logout r 192 168 24 99 255 255 192 0 192 168 1 ftest linx101 M Use Factory Default 00 04 60 01 04 4C m out of sync Auto Detect Get Settings The entries marked with are required for proper operation Figure 54 IP Configuration Page with DHCP disabled LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 61 LOYTEC Z Config IP Microsoft Internet Explorer p Bl x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras aurik M x B A Suchen Se Favoriten C jw z L4 rel b Adresse E http 192 168 24 98 webuijconfig ip Wechseln zu Links Snagit E E n LOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin Oo Enable DHCP v Device Info IP Address m Config O IP Netmask UJ IP Gateway E System i D Hostname O Domainname DNS Server 1 leave empty to disable a Data Points DNS Server 2 i E Scheduler leave empty to disable m Calendar O DNS Serer 3 EET m Alarm lt leave empty to disable a 1 MAC Address v Statistics T M Use Factory Default C L Web NTP Server 1 leave empty to disable Reset NTP Server 2 leave empty to disable Contact NTP Status out of sync Link Speed amp Duplex Auto Detect Get Settings The entries marked with are required for proper operation Logout l reio O OOOO O O rere 7 z Figure 55 IP Configuration Page with DHCP enabled
40. GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 138 LOYTEC Version 3 0 multi state different conditions are defined The alarm is reported to the attached alarm server To Create an Intrinsic Alarm Condition 1 Selecta data point 2 Right click and select Create Alarm Condition from the context menu 3 For an analog data point the dialog as shown in Figure 124 appears Select the Alarm Server Optionally enter an Alarm Description If left empty the description of the data point is used Enter a Time Delay after which the condition is evaluated Select Low Limit and High Limit and put check marks if they shall be employed Enter a Deadband to account for hysteresis Create Alarm Condition x W Enable Alarm Condition Alarm Server critical Alarm Description Overheat Time Delay 5 s Deadband 0 00 Lowlimit 0 00 v Highlimt 100 Remove Alarm Condition Cancel Figure 124 Alarm Condition for an Analog Data Point 4 For a binary data point the dialog as shown in Figure 125 appears Select the Alarm Server Optionally enter an Alarm Description If left empty the description of the data point is used Enter a Time Delay after which the condition is evaluated Select the Alarm Value which triggers the alarm LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 139 LOYTEC Create Alarm Condition X Alarm Server critical Alarm Description Emergency Button Time Delay o s Alarm value me v
41. LINX 10X tries to register with the configuration server The device configuration menu is shown in Figure 31 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 42 LOYTEC CEA 852 Device Configuration Menu 2 Config server address gt lt unset gt 3 Config server port 1629 default 4 Config client port 1628 default 5 Device name Channel mode Standard Pri SNTP server lt unset gt Sec SNTP server lt unset gt Channel timeout PORE 6 Escrow timeout on 64 ms 7 Aggregation timeout on 16 ms 8 MD5 authentication So rod 9 MD5 secret not displayed 0 Location string unknown a NAT address t Auto no NAT b Multicast address unset q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 31 CEA 852 Device Configuration Menu In case that the configuration server contacts the LINX 10X only the MD5 secret in menu item 8 must be entered if authenticated communication is required In networks that communicate over the Internet one may also experiment with the escrow timeout in menu item 5 4 7 1 Option 2 Config server address 3 Config server port Please enter the IP address and port of the configuration server if the LINX 10X needs to contact the configuration server Enter 0 for the configuration server port if you want to return to the default port setting 4 7 2 Option 4 Config client port If only one LINX 10X is used in an IP 852 chann
42. LNS Database Scan is populated with the found NVs Data point names for those NVs are automatically generated following the convention node name object name NV name These names are ensured to be unique by adding a counter for multiple occurrences of the same name Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 114 LOYTEC hoy LOYTEC LINZ 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt l m x File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web 8 x D dk gnp Connected Device linec100 test3 Subsystem 1ilins Channel FT 10 Info Status Configured Online Datapoints Statistics L eb Projects ds omo Model No oo Set Auto Remote Datapoints Datapoint Hame Filter No Direction Datapoint Name Remote Ny Func Block In Mv Enz Contraller 1rnva ntemp nva tDtemp SMVT Eemp tnz Controller 1 Qut Mv Enz Contraller 1nvi itemp nviditemp SMVT Eemp tn2 Controller 1 Datapoint Configuration Elf Imported 0 7 CEA709 CSV File 0 Items Ef CEA709 LNS Scan ef tnzn 17 Datapoints 20 Items NAM In MV Enz cCentraller 1nva zlux nvatrlux SMVT lux tnz Controller 1 e 4 CEAT S Met 5 gp cy ca Qut NV En20Controller 1nvio3lux nvibralux SMWT lux tnn Controller 1 Eg LINs 100 N _tn20Controller_invoO4ley_percent nvoO4lev percent SNVT lev percent Enz Controller 1 id J System Registers 9 Items Qut N _tnZ0Controller_in
43. LOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin Update IP statistics Rx packets 0 Rx bytes 79902 Rx dropped 0 Rx no clusters D Rx CRC errors 0 Rx missed errors D Tx collisions D Tx resends D Tx packets 0 Tx bytes 216770 Rx no mbuf Bd Contact Rx oversize errors D Rx runt errors 0 Logout Tx ok 0 Tx dropped D Total IP packets received 3813 Total IP packets generated here 3853 Total TCP packets sent 3851 Total TCP data packets sent 1845 Total TCP data bytes sent 390363 Total TCP packets received 3770 Total UDP packets received 41 Total UDP packets sent 0 Update IP statistics rei ff terete Device Info Config Statistics B Scheduler B Alarm Log L Web Reset networks under control Figure 69 IP Statistics Page 5 3 2 CEA 852 Statistics Version 3 0 The CEA 852 statistics page displays the statistics data of the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X It is only displayed if the CEA 852 interface is enabled The contents are the same as available through the console UI see Section 4 11 1 The upper part of the CEA 852 statistics page is depicted in Figure 70 To update the statistics data press the button Update all CEA 852 statistics To reset all statistics counters to zero click on the button Clear all CEA 852 statistics The field Date Time of clear will reflect the time of the last counter reset LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual T1 LOYTEC A CEA 852 Statistics Microsoft Inte
44. Local Time and Local Date In manual mode the device does not switch to an external time source Note that if NTP is selected the NTP servers have to be configured in the IP Configuration page see Section 5 2 2 The timezone offset must be defined independently of the time source It is specified as the offset to GMT in hours and minutes e g Vienna Austria is 01 00 New York U S A is 06 00 For setting the daylight saving time DST pre defined choices are offered for Europe and U S A Canada DST can be switched off completely by choosing none or set LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 59 LOYTEC manually for other regions In that case start and end date of DST must be entered in the fields below 4 Config System Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras aris T ix i2 A a Suchen Se Favoriten C w z LJ rel x Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webui config system Y Wechseln zu Links 7 DLOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin sngt FE ps O Date Time Device Info u Time sync source auto Local Date 2008 08 12 yy y y mm dd Config OQ Local Time 20 04 17 hh mm ss JJ UTC Date Time 2008 08 12 18 04 17 E System m P U Timezone offset 01 00 hh mm Daylight saving time DST Europe DST start ias Su Mar 2 hh mm B Data Points 2 DST end last sz Su H Oct E h
45. NL 220 Please contact LOYTEC support if you think you need this feature LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 64 LOYTEC Z CEA 709 Router Microsoft Internet Explorer Bl x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras aw Zur ck x ix B m Suchen Se Favoriten T g jw rel 33 Adresse E http 192 168 24 99 webuijconfig router Wechseln zu Links Snaglt Sy n LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Oo Router made Configured Router Device Info ber Subnet node learning subnet node E Group learning O W F 7 Save Settings Get Settings D O Un lt O L E Ma gt m Data Points lar Scheduler D Calendar 7 m Alarm 5 Statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout zu Fertig POP Doa neret ZA Figure 58 CEA 709 Router Configuration Page 5 2 6 CEA 852 Device Configuration Version 3 0 The CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X can be configured in the CEA 852 device configuration page which is depicted in Figure 59 Typically the LINX 10X is added to an IP channel by entering the relevant information on a configuration server The configuration server then contacts the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X and sends its configuration The field Config server address and Config server port display the IP address and port of the configuration server which manages the LINX 10X and the IP channel The field Config c
46. Notification F M po o Figure 127 Basic Trend Object Configuration Logged Datapoints Remove Datapoint n aHumid CONV delta Trend Enable Disable Datapoint Remove Save Changes Cancel 4 Select the desired Trend Mode 5 Select the Log Size The display in the dialog will adapt the estimations for needed data logger file size in KB and duration of the trend log Alternatively for interval trends the estimated log duration and log interval can be edited 6 Select a Fill Level Notification percentage This will decide after how many percent new log items a fill level trigger will fire A fill level trigger can be used to trigger the transmission of an E Mail see Section 7 11 5 7 Click Save changes to store the basic configuration of the trend object The new trend log object appears in the data point list of the Trend folder 7 11 2 Configure Trended Data Points Version 3 0 When a local trend object has been created it needs to be configured which data points it shall log This is done by attaching data points to the trend object Only simple data points can be attached for trending i e of class analog binary or multi state For CEA 709 trend log objects multiple data points can be attached for trending The trending can be enabled disabled on behalf of an enable data point This data point must be of type binary If the value of that enabl
47. Operation Version 3 0 The LINX 101 supports remote LPA access This means that a protocol analyzer connected to the Ethernet network can connect to the LINX 101 and record all packets on the CEA 709 channel FT 10 Our LPA IP supports this sophisticated feature The principle functionality is shown in Figure 137 The LPA IP runs on a Windows PC that is connected to the Ethernet network In a LINX 101 device selection window one can e g select the LINX 101 with IP address 192 168 1 210 and display all packets on the FT 10 channel connected to the LINX 101 with IP address 192 168 1 210 For this operation the LPA IP does not need to be a member of the CN IP channel Note that this functionality is only possible with LINX 101 Internet routers IP 192 168 1 10 IP 192 168 1 208 Configuration i c rM Server for EE R IP 852 Channel bid LPA IP Ethernet Figure 137 Remote LPA principle LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 160 LOYTEC 8 7 Internet Timing Aspects If the LINX 101 s router is used over the Internet or in a large Intranet with unpredictable network delays the user should become familiar with the following advanced timing aspects Channel Timeout is set in the configuration server whereas escrowing and aggregation are set in the CEA 852 client device whereas the Channel Delay is a channel property of LNS and can be set in NL 220 LonMaker or other network management tools
48. The L Web software uses the standardized OPC XML DA Web service to communicate between L Web and remote LINX 100 or LINX 200 Automation Servers which makes it extremely firewall friendly and easy to setup The graphical design of the L Web user interface consists of pages which can simply be created by using the L Vis Configurator software without any know how in HTML Java etc Dynamic information is shown in the form of numeric values text changing icons bar graphs trend logs alarm and event lists or schedule controls The complete set of automation functions of the LINX 100 or LINX 200 Automation Server is fully supported by L Web The automation services are residing in the embedded LINX 100 or LINX 200 Automation Servers and distributed over the network to build up a dependable system with L Web only accessing these services Furthermore any kind of calculations data point connections etc are implemented on the embedded Automation Server which makes the application on the Automation Server completely independent from the connection to the L Web application Starting from the LINX 10X data point configuration the user can create an L Web project The L Web project contains the data point configuration of the Web service LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 170 LOYTEC interface and a graphical design for the L Web user interface For more information on creating graphical designs using the L Vis Configurator softwar
49. The LINX 10X comes configured with a unique MAC address This address can be changed in order to clone the MAC address of another device Please contact your system administrator to avoid MAC address conflicts The device can be configured to synchronize its clock with NTP time Enter the IP address of a primary and optionally a secondary NTP server The LINX 10X will use NTP as a time source if the time sync source in the system configuration page is set to NTP see Section 5 2 1 The field NTP status below the NTP server settings displays the current NTP synchronization status out of sync or in sync If the LINX 10X is operated with a IOMbit s only hub the link speed should be switched from Auto Detect to IOMbps Half Duplex With modern 100 10Mbit s switches this setting can be left at its default 5 2 3 Backup and Restore Version 3 0 A configuration backup of the LINX 10X device can be downloaded via the Web interface Press the backup link as shown in Figure 56 to start the download Then the LINX 10X device assembles a single file including all required files A file requestor dialog allows specifying the location where the backup file shall be stored To restore the device settings simply select a previously generated backup file in the Restore Configuration section of the page by clicking the button next to the Filename field Then press the Restore button The backed up configuration data consists of e
50. Type nf Data Type Figure 112 Manually created user register Double O Analog Datapoint 7 7 12 Configuration Download Version 3 0 After the data points have been configured the configuration needs to be downloaded to the LINX 10X For doing so the LINX 10X must be online If the LINX 10X is not yet connected to the network the configuration can be saved to a project file on the local hard drive If connected via LNS and the NVs on the LINX 10X are Static NV or Dynamic NV the LINX 10X Configurator can create the bindings automatically This behavior can be influenced by the download dialog When connected via LNS the download procedure also manages the device template upgrade in the LNS database if the static NV interface has been changed To Download a Configuration L In the main connections window click on the Download Configuration speed button File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web 0 HDn g Rajo olr in the tool bar of the main connections window This will open the configuration download dialog as shown in Figure 113 If no bindings shall be generated deselect the Automatically create bindings checkbox indicated by the red circle in Figure 113 If the static NV interface has been changed a new model number for the LINX 10X needs to be selected This is necessary as the static network interface of the LINX 10X changes on the CEA 709 network T
51. Version 3 0 135 23 2 51 135 23 2 52 Figure 129 The LINX 101 supports different methods to route packets between the CEA 709 and IP 852 channel Depending on the CEA 709 router configuration see Section the LINX 101 supports 4 different methods to route packets between the CEA 709 and the IP 852 channel The 4 operating modes are listed below and described in more detail in the subsequent sections e Configured Router The LINX 101 acts like a standard CEA 709 configured router i LON 1000 600 alike e Smart Switch The LINX 101 acts as a self learning plug amp play router smart switch mode e Store and Forward Repeater To freeze a learned configuration and operate the switch based on the existing forwarding tables disable group learning and Subnet Node learning e Smart switch with no broadcast flooding Set Subnet Node Learning set to subnet In this mode the LINX 101 learns the network topology but doesn t flood subnet broadcasts LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 150 LOYTEC 8 1 1 Configured Router Mode In this operating mode the LINX 101 acts like a standard configured router which can be configured with standard network management tools like LonMaker or NL 220 This operating mode is compatible with the i LON 1000 and the 7 LON 600 This operating mode uses the channel routing routing strategy on the IP channel In this mode the LINX 101 is fully compatible with i LON 1000 600 devic
52. Version 3 0 3l LOYTEC NJ dD Power Supply Ethernet C D Figure 16 Connecting the Earth Ground to the LINX 10X LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 32 LOYTEC 4 Console Interface 4 1 Console Connection The LINX 10X is equipped with a serial interface to e display the results of the self test e allow configuration via a console menu e upgrade the LINX 10X firmware To use the serial interface the console connector see Figure 14 of the LINX 10X can be connected to the RS 232 port of a PC The PC can communicate with the LINX 10X using a standard terminal program with communication settings of 38 400 bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit Use a standard null modem cable with full handshaking to connect the LINX 10X serial console interface to your PC 4 2 Self Test Whenever the LINX 10X comes out of reset it performs a self test The console output of a successful boot sequence on an LINX 10X reads as depicted in Figure 17 The duration of a successful boot sequence of an LINX 10X is typically 30 seconds Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH www loytec com esting Board ID 0 esting RAM rT3 Hi ting boot loader Testing fallback image Testing primary image Testing Flash Loading primary image Bootloader version 2 LINX 10x Firmware Type bootshell to enter the boot shell Primary Image loading
53. Version 3 0 Enable Legacy Network Management Mode This group box contains check boxes for each CEA 709 port of the device Put a check mark on the port if this port shall be operated in the legacy network management mode In that mode the port does not use the extended command set ECS of network management commands This can be necessary to operate the device with some network management tools that do not support the ECS Default Pollcycle for External NVs When using external NVs this pollcycle is set as a default for input data points The pollcycle can be edited individually in the properties view of the data point manager Use state member of SNVT switch as This setting defines how the state member of the SNVT switch shall be mapped to a data point Depending on how the data point shall be used it can be binary or multi state The multi state setting allows setting the UNSET state explicitly As a binary point the UNSET state is implicitly chosen when the invalid value is written Configuration Download This group box contains self configuration settings for the CEA 709 ports This is necessary when the device shall be used without being commissioned by a network management tool Set the check mark and enter the CEA 709 domain and subnet node information If operated in self configured mode the CEA 709 network can be scanned using the network scan see Section 7 7 6 and external NVs can be used on the device Note that the domain
54. Web JD SERA Aa Alp vols in the tool bar The upload system log dialog as shown in Figure 117 opens showing the upload progress FTP Connection Already connected Upload varflog system log Dane Upload varflog system log 0 Dane Upload varjlog system lag 1 Dane Upload varJlog system lag z Lag empty Shaw System Log Figure 117 Upload system log dialog 3 When the upload is finished click on Show System Log The system log window appears as shown in Figure 118 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 127 LOYTEC Syslog 2008 08 05 09 43 58 395 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 100 1 9 33 Build Tue Aug 5 09 11 10 2008 2008 08 05 09 43 58 399 NOTE 4pplication Reset to Factory defaults 2008 08 05 09 44 09 805 NOTE Application Boot process Finished 2008 08 05 09 45 26 411 NOTE 4pplication Shutdown 2008 08 05 09 45 26 519 NOTE 4pplication Reset 2008 08 05 09 45 26 525 NOTE 055100000002 0551 Lag terminating 2008 08 05 09 45 49 175 NOTE Applicatian Log initialized LINX 100 v1 9 33 Build Tue Aug 5 09 11 10 2008 2008 08 05 09 45 59 510 NOTE Application Boot process Finished 2008 08 05 09 49 10 542 NOTE Application Shutdown 2008 08 05 09 49 10 640 NOTE 4pplication Reset Figure 118 System log window 4 Click on Save to store the system log into a file on your local hard drive 7 8 E Mail Templates 7 8 1 Create
55. Z Figure 64 Schedule Configuration Page S Scheduler Microsoft Internet Explorer i loj x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Qai O ix 2 Z JO suchen Se Favoriten w LJ 4 3 Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webui config sched_cfg handle 0x10e9067c Wechseln zu Links amp Snaglt E DLOYTEC Schedule Configuration Scheduled Data Points Save Reload Add Preset Data Point Name Data Type day Output 0 double 20 Data Points Scheduler Calendar Alarm Statistics networks under control L Web Reset Contact Logout wp o0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 OTT nee 5 z Figure 65 Scheduled Data Point Value Configuration Page Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 73 LOYTEC You can switch back and forth between the two tabs Once the configuration is complete click on the Save button This updates the schedule in the device Any changes made become effective immediately 5 2 11 Calendar The Web interface provides the calendar page to edit its calendars at run time 1 e change the exception days The calendar main page displays all available calendars Click on the calendar to be edited This opens the calendar configuration page An example is shown in Figure 66 The effective period defines when this calendar shall be in effect Leave From and To at 7 to make this calendar always in effect Otherwise enter dates
56. a Name Dir Type Value State Config O TREDEENUSEMD System Registers v CEA709 Port System Time input analog 1218565641 000000normal B Svetem is CPU Load input analog 5 900000 normal IP oie QU Free Memory input analog 5933176 000000 normal ER O Free Flash input analog 4143824 000000 normal B Bsrkun e c Supply Voltage input analog 15 700000 normal E System Temp input analog 42 200000 normal T Application Vendor input analog invalid value VY Authentication Code output analog invalid value x Authentication Result input binary FALSE normal O CEA709 Port Datapoints N tn20Controller_1nvoOOtemp input analog 273 300000 offline E Data Points NY tn20Controller 1nvi Ttemp output analog invalid value Scheduler 4 NY tn20Controller 1 nvoU2lux input analog 7 000000 offline B Calendar D NY tn20Controller 1nvi 3lux output analog invalid value B Alam kz NV tn20Controller 1nvo 4lev percent input analog 0 700000 offline 2 NY tn20Controller 1nvill5lev percent output analog invalid value A NY tn20Controller 1nvoDbtemp f input analog 0 700000 offline Statistics NV_tn20Controller_1nvil7temp_f output analog invalid value CEAT09 Port Statistics L Web Elapsed Time input analog 90440 000000 normal Average Packet Rate input analog 2 000000 normal Bandwidth Utilization input analog 0 000000 normal Reset Max Bandwidth Utilization input analog 3 500000 normal CRC Error Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Contac
57. address or device name of the CEA 852 device 4 9 13 Option d Delete device Select this menu item to delete a CEA 852 device on the IP 852 channel The LINX 101 prompts the device number which shall be deleted A list of available CEA 852 devices 1s displayed with the menu item 1 4 9 14 Option n Enable Disable device Select this menu option to enable or disable a CEA 852 device on the IP 852 channel An enabled device can be disabled and a disabled device can be enabled The LINX 101 prompts the device number which shall be enabled disabled A list of available CEA 852 devices with their current status is displayed with the menu item 1 Disabled members are temporarily removed from the IP 852 channel and do not receive messages 4 9 15 Option s Show device statistics Select this menu item to display statistics information for the client devices The LINX 101 prompts the device number which shall be examined This number can be found in the Channel Member List see Section 4 9 16 Please note that this feature allows extracting the statistics information from remote client devices over the IP 852 channel 4 9 16 Option List channel members Version 3 0 Select this menu item to list all IP 852 channel members List of channel members No Name IP Address Status Flags 000 local 80 125 123 100 1628 registered NAT Router 80 168 1 250 001 dJrpnatd 10 0 2 3 1628 registered 002 lipnat i 10 0 2 4
58. alarm The data type is string The written data is an XML document which contains the alarmAck element The write must specify the XAID 9 1 3 4 Trend Log Objects Version 3 0 Each trend log object on the LINX 10X is represented as a folder in the OPC name space This folder contains a number of tags describing and controlling the trend log To retrieve log records however the XML DA tag interface cannot be used There are two options 1 retrieve the complete log as a CSV file or use the proprietary Data Log Web service XML DL That Web service uses the logHandle provided by a tag The CSV file location can be obtained from a tag also e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains trendLog dataLog or alarmLog It identifies this folder as a trend log data log or alarm log folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the node tag e Purge boolean read write When writing TRUE to this tag the log is purged LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 169 LOYTEC e TotalCnt unsignedInt read only This tag contains the total number of logged records This number can be larger than the BufferSize e BufferSize unsignedInt read write The size in records of the log buffer Writing to this tag can resize the log buffer if it is disabled e LogHandle string read only const This handle specifies the data log
59. and 17 3 4 2 Status LED The LINX 10X is equipped with a red status LED see Figure 14 This LED is normally off During boot up the status LED is used to signal error conditions red If the fall back image is executed the status LED flashes red once every second 3 4 3 OPC LED The OPC Server LED illuminates green when at least one OPC client is connected to the OPC server The LED flickers on OPC XML DA traffic activity Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 27 LOYTEC 3 4 4 FT Activity LED The FT port on the LINX 10X has a three color LED green red and orange see Figure 14 Table 1 shows different LED patterns of the port and their meaning GREEN flashing at 1Hz The OPC node or LINX 101 s router port is On the LINX 101 this LED is only unconfigured permanent on if both node and router are commissioned RED flashing fast Traffic with high amount of errors LS RED flashing at 1 Hz Firmware image corrupt Please upload new firmware all ports ORANGE permanent Port disabled e g using LSD Tool ORANGE flashing fast Traffic on port configured as management port e g using LSD Tool Table 1 CEA 709 Activity LED Patterns 3 4 5 Ethernet Link LED The Ethernet Link LED lights up green whenever an Ethernet cable is plugged in and a physical connection with a switch hub or PC can be established 3 4 6 Ethernet Activity LED The Ethernet Activity LED lights up green for 6 ms whenever a packet
60. andc5e734c823031 1 Device Mame Scan Status Controls Device scan done Found z devices 2 new D existing Connected Scanner Device _Discover on Service Fin at Stet ise PLE 192 168 38 2 Configured Online Refresh State serie Manually set domain ERES b EY CE Domain Length bytes fi i Domain ID in hex E mu Subnet f Made o l o7 Set Get Domain From Network Figure 105 CEA 709 network scan dialog 5 Click on the button Discover Devices This starts a network scan The results are put in the device list box 6 Alternatively click the button Discover on Service Pin Then press the service pin of a particular device on the network This device will be added to the device list 7 Select a device in the device list and click the button Scan Device This scans the NVs on the selected device and adds them to the CEA709 852 Network Scan folder as a separate sub folder for the device as shown in Figure 106 Tip If you are not sure which device you have selected click on Wink Device The selected device will execute its wink sequence Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 117 LOYTEC il LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINZ 1 00 Unbenannt z ml x File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web E E x Di ao ed Ma Sd Be el fe Ell Connected Device 192 168 24 95 Info Status Configured Online Datapoints Stati
61. created static NVs are not bound automatically by the LINX 10X Configurator They simply appear on the device and need to be bound in the network management tool 7 7 10 Create External NVs Version 3 0 External NVs are not actually allocated NVs on the LINX 10X Instead the LINX 10X uses polling to read data from and explicit updates to write data to external NVs Since external NVs are not affecting the static NV interface of the LINX 10X they can be used to extend an LINX 10X s interface configuration at run time when no LNS with dynamic NVs is available To Create an External NV manually Select the LINX 10X CEA 709 Port Datapoints folder LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 120 LOYTEC Er 2 LINZ 100 A System Registers 9 Items H User Registers 0 Items Eis 0 Trend 0 Items 2 Right click in the data point list and select New Datapoint in the context menu This opens the NV creation dialog 3 Click on the tab External as shown in Figure 109 Create New NY P xj Static External Application Device Properties Datapoint Mame my_external_switch Remote Mv Mame nyo swiEch Resource File STANDARD Tvpe switch 85 Direction Input MV Selector ox O18f MY Index o Address Type noder i Select a Device DDC L Vis Igate LNS Network InterFace bac_lon test mode NV Flags Auth Cfg Authenticate Priority Cfg Priority Unack Repea
62. device in the Operation group box To use the current settings of the device as default values for new devices select Set device template defaults from device 4 Execute the operation by clicking the OK button To Synchronize CPs in NL220 1 Double click on the device object in the device tree 2 Press the Upload button on the Configuration tab of the device properties see Figure 116 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 126 LOYTEC General fni LonMar xL Network N s Config amp MSGs VER Filet Plugins 4 MLC N Consult pour device s documentation about configurations Close SCPT invrtOut SCPT direction SCPT direction SCPT driveT ime SCPT drive ime p SCPTmaxRcevTime SCPT masAeyT ime Help Upload Download Copy all Figure 116 Configuration Tab for Configuration Properties in NL220 7 7 17 Upload the System Log The system log on the device contains important log messages Log messages are generated for important operational states e g last boot time last shutdown reason or errors at run time This file is important for trouble shooting and is available on the Web UI see Section 5 3 5 The file can also be uploaded from the device with the LINX 10X Configurator To Upload the System Log 1 Connect to the LINX 10X via the FTP or LNS method see Section 7 7 2 2 Click on the Upload system log button File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L
63. each remote scheduler point need to be bound to the respective nvoSchedLink variable located in the Scheduler functional block of the remote device The binding between the nvoSchedLink vanable on the remote device to the nviSchedLink variable on the local device defines which of the scheduler data points on the local device connect to which scheduler unit on the remote device All required information is transmitted over the link NVs so it is possible to later change the binding to any other remote scheduler without rescanning the network If connected via LNS the bindings to the nvoCalLink and nvoSchedLink NVs are made automatically by the configuration software in the download process 7 12 2 Alarm Clients Note Version 3 0 Accessing alarm server objects on remote devices is done by creating remote alarm data points These points may be created from data obtained by a network scan The local device is configured as an alarm client and subscribes to alarm updates from the remote alarm server The alarm client can also be used to acknowledge alarms on the remote alarm server Any updates are synchronized back to the alarm client To Create an Alarm Client 1 Execute a network scan as described earlier in this document The scan folder is filled with available remote alarm servers Elf CEA709 Network Scan El 2 s0000007da58 2 From the points in the import folder select the alarm server points you are interested in and click
64. i i olf Remote Devices B9 Global Objects 0 0 Analog Datapoint ind Data Type M Unsigned Long 16 bit unsigned integer DLOYTEC Configurator ready E Figure 106 CEA 709 network scan results 8 Click Close when all devices needed have been scanned 7 7 7 Select and Use Network Variables Data points in the CEA709 LNS Scan folder the CEA709 Network Scan folder or in the CEA709 CSV File folder can be selected for use on the LINX 10X Select those NVs which shall be connected IEC61131 variables To Use NVs on the LINX 10X 1 Go to any of the LNS database scan CEA709 852 Network Scan or the CSV File folder 2 Use the multi select feature by holding the Shift or Ctrl keys pressed 3 Click on the button e Use on Device in the tool bar 4 This creates data points in the LINX 10X CEA709 Port folder All data points in that folder will actually be created on the LINX 10X device after downloading the configuration Tip Data points can be edited by selecting a single point or using multi select The available properties to be edited are displayed in the property view below 7 7 8 Change the NV Allocation After selecting the Use on device action on scanned or imported NVs they are assigned a default NV allocation in the LINX 10X CEA709 port folder This default allocation can be Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 118 LOYTEC changed e g
65. interval nvolvalMisPre exceeded the limit defined by the SCPThighLimit default switched off If an overload is detected the network variable is set to 100 ON while if no error occurred it is set to 0 OFF e nvoChnlAlarmRat SNVT lev cont Ratio between statistic intervals during which the channel was in overload alarm condition and intervals during which the channel was not in overload alarm condition since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset In addition each channel monitor object has the following SCPTs e SCPTifaceDesc This configuration property contains a human readable name of the monitored port Possible values on the LINX 10X are CEA 709 IP inactive e SCPTmaxSndT Defines how often output NVs are transmitted Exceptions are nvoPort nvoElapsedTime which are polled only 10 2 5 Calendar Object When the scheduler objects are enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes the standard LONMARK calendar object 10 2 6 Scheduler Object When the scheduler objects are enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes the configured number of standard LONMARK scheduler objects Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 184 LOYTEC 10 2 7 Clients Object When the remote AST object feature is enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes a proprietary object which is a container for network variables required to implement the rem
66. is transmitted or received or when a collision is detected on the network cable 3 4 7 CNIP LED The CNIP LED is a three color LED that indicates different operating states of the LINX 10X s CEA 852 device Green The CEA 852 device is fully functional and all CEA 852 configuration data channel routing info channel membership list send list are up to date Green flicker If a valid CEA 709 packet is received or transmitted over the IP channel the CNIP LED turns off for 50 ms Only valid CEA 709 IP packets sent to the IP address of the LINX 10X can be seen Stale packets or packets not addressed to the LINX 10X are not seen Yellow Device is functional but some configuration data is not up to date device cannot contact configuration server but has configuration data saved in Flash memory Red Device is non functional because it was rejected from the CEA 852 IP channel or shut down itself due to an internal error condition Off Device 1s non functional because the CEA 852 device has not started This can be the case if the LINX 10X uses DHCP and it has not received a valid IP configuration address from the DHCP server Flashing Red at 1 Hz Device is non functional because the CEA 852 device is started but has not been configured Please add the device to a CEA 852 IP channel register in configuration server Flashing green or orange at 1 Hz The LINX 10X s CEA 709 side of the gateway has not been commissioned yet The co
67. local calendar is used it needs to be configured with calendar patterns A calendar pattern represents a class of days such as Holidays The calendar patterns can then be used in a schedule to define daily schedules for exception days The available calendar patterns should be created when the system configuration 1s engineered The actually dates in the calendar patterns can be modified later at run time To Create a Calendar Pattern 1 Select an existing calendar data point Ma Direction Calendar Mame 2 Right click and select Create Calendar Pattern 3 Enter a Pattern Name in the Create Calendar Pattern dialog Create New Pattern Pattern Name Holidays 4 Click Create Pattern The dialog closes and the calendar pattern appears beneath the calendar data point Local calendar objects Mao Direction Calendar Mame Index Func Block Use ID E 1 In calendar D 1030 7 9 3 Create a Local Scheduler For scheduling data points a scheduler object must be created On each port multiple local scheduler objects can be created These local schedulers can then be configured to schedule data points To Create a Local Scheduler 1 Under the port folder select the Scheduler sub folder to create a scheduler Ei 3 CEA709 Port _J Datapoints 1 Items oJ Calendar 1 Items EN E Scheduler 0 Items 2 Right click in the data point list view and select New Local Scheduler Version 3 0 LOYTEC ele
68. must match the nodes domain on the network and the subnet node address must not be used by another device LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 99 LOYTEC Project Settings x General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA 7098 cEAz09 AST Enable Legacy Network Management Mode Datapoint Settings Default Pallevcle Far External Wys 10 5 Use state member of snvt_switch as binary datapoink multistate datapoint Configuration Download Configure device s domain Domain Length bytes 0 r Domain ID tin hex Subnet Node 254 i 120 i Cancel Figure 84 CEA 709 Project Settings 7 3 4 AST Settings For CEA709 devices the use of alarming scheduling trending AST features requires additional resources functional objects and NVs This changes the static interface Since the number of used resources also influences the performance the CEA 709 AST tab allows configuring those resources for the project In this tab the required number of scheduler units that may be instantiated and their capacity may be configured how many time value entries value templates bytes per value template and so on It contains the following options and settings which are relevant to calendar and scheduler functionality of the device e Enable Calendar Object This checkbox enables a LONMARK compliant calendar object on the device It is automatically enabled together with local schedul
69. network management tool with bindings see Section 7 4 4 7 4 1 Involved Configuration Files In the configuration process there are a number of files involved e XIF file This is the standard file format to exchange the static interface of a device This file can be used to create a device in the database without having the LINX 10X on line There exists a XIF for the FT port LINX 10x_FT 10 xif and one for the IP 852 port LINX 1Ox IP 10L xif e LINX IOX Configurator project file This file contains all ports all data points and all connections of a project These files end with linxO It stores all the relevant configuration data and is intended to be saved on a PC to back up the LINX 10X s data point configuration 7 4 2 Configure with LNS Version 3 0 The flow diagram in Figure 86 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to configure the LINX 10X in a network with LNS 3 x In this scenario the LINX 10X will use dynamic NVs and bindings First the LINX 10X device must be added to LNS see Section 7 5 Then the LINX 10X Configurator must be started in plug in mode to configure the LINX 10X see Section 7 7 1 In the Configurator scan for the data points in the LNS database see Section 7 7 4 Select the data points that the LINX 10X shall expose see Section 7 7 7 Finally the configuration needs to be downloaded onto the LINX 10X see Section 7 7 12 It is recommended to save the complete configuration to
70. network variables and how to expose those data points to the OPC server We show the configuration steps using NL 220 LonMaker 3 1 and Alex 3 but other LNS based network management tools can be used as well to install and configure the LINX 10X We also show how to configure the LINX 10X without LNS 7 1 Installation 7 1 1 Software Installation The LINX 10X Configurator must be used to setup the data point configuration of the LINX 10X The Configurator is installed as a plug in tool for all LNS based network management tools as well as a stand alone tool for systems without LNS System requirements e LNS 3 1 Service Pack 8 or higher for LNS mode e Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows 2003 Server and Windows Vista The LINX 10X Configurator can be downloaded from the LOYTEC website http www loytec com To install the Configurator double click on Setup and follow the installation steps When asking for the type of installation there are two options to choose from Select Typical to install the required program files Select Full to install the LONMARK resource files along with the software This option is useful when the system does not have the newest resource files 7 1 2 Registration as a Plug In Version 3 0 If the LINX 10X shall be configured using LNS based tools e g NL200 or LonMaker the LINX 10X Configurator needs to be registered as an LNS plug in In the following the process is described for LonMaker for Windo
71. on the LINX 10X s file system Use the admin account to upload the content via FTP into the directory var www For example a page named my_page html put directly into var www can be accessed via http 192 168 24 100 my_page html given that the IP address is correct LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 176 LOYTEC 10 Operating Interfaces 10 1 Common Interface 10 1 1 Schedule and Calendar XML Files The daily schedule and calendar pattern configuration can be changes at run time over the Web UI or the network An alternate way to change that configuration is to download a schedule and calendar XML file via FTP onto the device After the file has been downloaded the new configuration becomes effective immediately The device does not need to be rebooted The files are located in tmp uid sched UID xml tmp uid cal UID xml The UID is the unique ID of the data point The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list as shown in Figure 128 A schedule data point with UID 107C would result in the schedule XML file tmp uid sched 107C xml The UID remains constant for the life time of the data point even when the name or description is changed The content of the XML file must be compliant to the scheduleCfg schema This schema can be found at the LOYTEC Web site The XML documents can refer to the target namespace http www loytec com xsd scheduleCfg 1 0 10 1 2 Trend Log CS
72. packets are combined into a single CEA 852 data packet Please enter the time in ms or 0 to disable aggregation The maximum time is 255 ms Note that disabling aggregation will negatively affect the performance of the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X The field MD5 authentication enables or disables MD5 authentication Note that MD5 authentication cannot be used together with the i LON 1000 since the i LON 1000 is not fully compliant with the CEA 852 authentication method MDS can be used with the i LON 600 In the following field MD5 secret enter the 16 byte MD5 secret Note that for security purposes the active MD5 secret is not displayed You may enter the 16 bytes as one string or with spaces between each byte E g 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC DD EE FF Also note that entering the MD5 secret on the Web interface may pose a security risk Since the information is transmitted over the network it can be subject for eavesdroppers on the line It is recommended to either use a cross over cable or enter the secret on the console UI see Section 4 7 Enter a location string with a maximum length of 255 characters This is optional and for informational purposes only In the field Location string the user can enter a descriptive test which identifies the physical location of the LINX 10X A location string can have a maximum length of 255 characters This is optional and for informational purposes only If the CEA 852 device on
73. rate 1000 msec wait time 10000 msec Hold time o msec Export to OPC Bridge Export to File Cancel Figure 142 Bridge Export dialog 9 3 4 Import OPC Servers Using the Configurator When using OPC server information exported by the Configurator the exported server definition must be imported to the OPC bridge This can be also done using the Configurator software The Configurator software must be installed on the same PC as the OPC bridge for doing so To Import a Server Definition 1 Open the Configurator software 2 Select the menu File gt Import Bridge Configuration 3 In the file requestor select the bridge configuration XML file which has previously been exported and click Ok 4 The OPC Bridge Device Properties dialog displays the imported bridge information 5 Click Export to Bridge to add the respective COM server to the bridge 6 Click Save 9 3 5 Manually Configure Servers The OPC bridge configuration can also be edited manually The same procedure is also applicable to verify imported OPC server definitions in the bridge software After adding a server definition in the bridge software the LINX 10X will be available as a COM OPC server through the bridge To Configure a Server in the Bridge 1 Start the OPC bridge from the Windows Start menu under Programs gt LOYTEC OPC Bridge gt OPC Bridge manual Setup Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 175 LOYTEC 2 Inthe syste
74. reachable No RTT is displayed The device is either not online not connected to the network has no IP address or is not reachable behind its NAT router Execute this test on the suspicious device to determine any NAT configuration problem Table 5 Possible Communication Problems 4 12 Data Point Menu Version 3 0 The LINX 10X data point menu as shown in Figure 48 allows the user to list data points get and set values of the data points Note that the Console data point UI is kept very simple For more convenient access to data points the user may also consult the Web UI see Section 5 2 9 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 54 LOYTEC Data Point Menu 1 Data Points 2 Get Value 3 Set Value q Quit without saving Please choose Figure 48 LINX 10X Data Point Menu 4 12 1 Option 1 List Data Points Select this option to list all data points on the LINX 10X The list is flat and displays the values and status of each data point An example is shown in Figure 49 Data Points CEA709 Port node NV nodelCtrlnvil7state bit0 invalid value input invalid value NV nodelCtrlnvol 6state bit0 0 output NV nodelCtrlnvilb5fire test invalid value input invalid value NV nodelCtrlnvol4fire test 2 output NV nodelCtrlnvil3amp invalid value input invalid value NV nodelCtrlnvol2amp 773 200000 output CEA709 Port node gt NV nodelCtrlnvil7state invalid value output in
75. routed back to the LINX 10X It is a measure for general network delay If the test to a specific member fails a text is displayed to describe the possible source of the problem The reasons for failure are summarized in Table 5 5 3 4 CEA 709 Statistics Version 3 0 The CEA 709 statistics page displays statistics data of the CEA 709 port on the LINX 10X as shown in Figure 72 This data can be used to troubleshoot networking problems To update the data click on the button Update CEA 709 statistics LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 79 4 CEA 709 Statistics Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Ansicht Extras Q arik 7 M ix E TN JO suchen f Favoriten B w rel X Adresse amp http 192 168 24 98 webui statistics orion app Bearbeiten Favoriten wechseln zu Links amp Snagit Si DLOYTEC LOYTEC e 0 000 00 0 0 0 00 0000000 0 0 0 0 T1 T TL LT 5 3 5 System Log Device Info Config Statistics IP a E System Log m CEA 709 m Scheduler m Alarm Log L Web Reset Contact Logout networks under control Update CEA 709 statistics Device CEA 709 FT 10 Node state unconfigured 0x02 Transmission errors OO Transmit TX failures lo Lost messages lo Missed messages lo Layer 2 received lo Layer 3 received lo Layer 3 transmitted lo Transmit TX retries lo Backlog overflows lo Late acknowledgments lo Collisions lo Out buffers us
76. smoothly Statistics Menu 1 Show CEA 852 statistics 2 Show CEA 709 application statistics 4 Show IP statistics 6 Enhanced communications test q Quit Please choose Figure 39 Device Statistics Menu 4 11 1 Option 1a CEA 852 device statistics Version 3 0 A sample console output is shown in Figure 40 The first part displays CEA 852 device statistics which are part of the standard and are comparable to e g the i LON 600 Press y to go on to extended statistics CEA 852 Device Statistics Seconds since cleared 261 Date Time of clear GMT Wed Sep 27 16 18 19 2006 No of members 0 LT Packets received 0 LT Bytes received lt unknown gt LT Packets sent 0 LT Bytes sent lt unknown gt IP Packets sent 0 IP Bytes sent 0 IP Packets received 0 IP Bytes received 0 IP Packets data sent 0 IP Packets data received 0 LT Stale packets 0 RFC Packets sent 0 RFC Packets received 0 Avg aggregation to IP unknown Avg aggregation from IP unknown UDP Packets sent 0 TCP Packets sent e 0 Multi cast Packets sent 0 Show extended CEA 852 device statistics y n Figure 40 CEA 852 Device Statistics A sample console output of the extended CEA 852 device statistics is shown in Figure 41 At the end the user is prompted if the statistics shall be cleared Press y to reset all counters to Q LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 50 LOYTEC
77. structured data points and represents the entirety of the structure 6 2 2 Timing Parameters Version 3 0 Apart from the meta data data points can be configured with a number of timing parameters The following properties are available to input or output data points respectively e Pollcycle input The value is given in seconds which specifies that this data point periodically polls data from the source e Receive Timeout input This is a variation on the poll cycle When receive timeout is enabled the data point actively polls the source unless it receives an update For example if poll cycle is set to 10 seconds and an update is received every 5 seconds no extra polls are sent e Poll on startup input If this flag is set the data point polls the value from the source when the system starts up Once the value has been read no further polls are sent unless a poll cycle has been defined e Minimum Send Time output This is the minimum time that elapses between two consecutive updates If updates are requested more often they are postponed and the LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 84 LOYTEC last value is eventually transmitted after the minimum send time Use this setting to limit the update rate e Maximum Send Time output This is the maximum time without sending an update If no updates are requested the last value is transmitted again after the maximum send time Use this setting to enable a he
78. such as 30 1 2000 3 Calendar Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 xl Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ae o Zur ck B ix i2 A Suchen Se Favoriten z w m dd 2 Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webuijconfig cal cFg handle 0x10e90ca8 DLOYTEC LINX 100 Lo gge d in as admin amp Snagit Ey v Wechseln zu Links CO Save Reload O Bw Device Info a dud Z 9 Name calendar Description rT Effective Period From oe ER To LE B Ee C Calendar Patterns Pattern Configuration p Pattern Name Pattern Name Holiday m Data Paints Y oliday Type Date B Scheduler Se Add new entry T Pattern Ent Calendar O E 4 TES x Day Month Year M Alarm lt Delete Selected Add new entry 14 bd 7 Ir gt J Statistics D C Delete Selected L Web Reset Contact Logout E P i gg Internet ZA Figure 66 Calendar Configuration Page On the remainder of this page work from left to right Click on a calendar pattern or create a new calendar pattern by clicking Add new entry A calendar pattern defines a set of pattern entries which defines the actual dates or date ranges In the example in Figure 66 the calendar pattern Holidays is selected In the Pattern Configuration box the calendar pattern s name can be edited It also lists the entries New entries can be added by clicking A
79. the LINX 10X is used behind a NAT router the public IP address of the NAT router or firewall must be known To automatically detect the NAT address leave the Auto NAT checkmark enabled The Multicast Address field allows the user to add the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X into a multi cast group for the CEA 852 IP channel Enter the channel s IP multi cast address here On how to obtain a valid multi cast address please contact your system administrator To learn when it is beneficial to use multi cast addresses in your channel please refer to the L IP User s Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 66 LOYTEC S CEA 852 Device Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ij X Y TA il CA X n b lt Zur ck ix B fu Suchen I Favoriten 4 DoS Kee jw L4 rel 3S Adresse e http 192 168 24 99 webuijconfig cnip cc cfg Wechseln zu Links gt LOYTEC Snagit E Far Config server address 192 168 24 99 C Config server port 1629 Config client port 1628 i Device name local D O Channel mode Standard Pri SNTP server Sec SNTP server m CEA3852 Device 2 Channel timeout ms off 2 Server i Escrow timeout ms p4 zh List O leave empty to disable SEA lt Aggregation timeout rms jis Data Points n leave empty to disable B Scheduler D m Calendar C MD5 authentication off B Alarm Warn
80. the Use on Device speed button This creates the corresponding alarm client points in your project E d Remnte Devices S E s0000007da58 i Alarm 1 Items 3 Select the new alarm client point and adjust the name of the local NV default name is nviAlarm_2 This NV is located in the Clients functional block Due to the static input NV which is required for a CEA709 alarm client point adding alarm clients will change the static interface of the device The new static input NVs representing the alarm clients on the local device need to be bound to the alarm outputs of the remote device A CEA709 device normally delivers alarms through an output NV of type SNVT alarm 2 located in the node object of the device therefore the new input NV on the local device must be bound to the alarm output NV of the remote devices node object All required information is transmitted over the LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 147 LOYTEC Note alarm input NV so it is possible to later bind the alarm client to any other alarm server without rescanning the network If connected via LNS the binding to the nvoAlarm2 NV is made automatically by the configuration software in the download process 7 13 Math Objects 7 13 1 Create a Math Object Version 3 0 Math objects are advanced application objects that can execute mathematical operations on data points A math object takes a number of input data points variables vi vo Vn and
81. the configuration to activate the change 7 7 15 Upload Dynamic NVs from Device In LNS based tools it is possible to create dynamic NVs on the device manually This is a possible workflow to engineer the NV interface of the device in the LNS database To use those manually created dynamic NVs the LINX 10X Configurator must synchronize its dynamic NV information with the port To Upload Dynamic NVs 1 Select the CEA709 Port folder E 2 LINK 100 e 0 System Registers 8 Items User Registers 2 Items SAEED Port F Datapoints 1 Items 0 Calendar 0 Items 71 Scheduler 0 Items 2 Right click and select Syne Dynamic NVs in the context menu The LINX 10X Configurator then loads any new dynamic NVs which have been created and are not yet part of the port interface definition The process completes when the dialog shown in Figure 114 appears Dynamic NV Synchronization Status Done Found 0 Wys 0 new O existing Figure 114 Synchronizing dynamic NVs from the device 3 Click on Finish The new dynamic NVs now appear in the data point list and can be edited and used on the device 7 7 16 Working with Configuration Properties Version 3 0 Configuration properties CPs are supported by the LNS network scan and the online network scan They can be selected and used on the device in a similar way as NVs There is a notable difference to NVs CPs are part of files on the remote nodes Reading and writi
82. the maximum number of schedules supported by each scheduler object This number must at least be 7 since a scheduler always needs to provide one schedule for each day of the week default weekly schedule For each special day defined by the calendar an additional daily schedule is required to support it Entries in Time Value table This is the total number of entries in each scheduler defining a value template that should apply on a specific day starting at a specific time the time table Number of value templates This is the maximum number of value templates supported by each scheduler Data size per value template This specifies the buffer size reserved to hold the data for each value template More data points or bigger data structures require a bigger value buffer Max number of data point maps Specifies the maximum number of individual data points that this scheduler is able to control AST Configuration Size This number in Bytes is calculated from the scheduler settings above and represents the total size of the LONMARK configuration properties file stored on the device While certain settings can be freely edited within the given limits the resulting configuration size is also limited Project Settings x General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA7D9 CEA709 AST Calendar Schedule Object Settings Resources required by the current project Enable Calendar Object EUER Enable Scheduler Objects Local calen
83. tool The LINX 10X also includes channel monitoring objects for the FT and the IP 852 channel which make the channel statistics available through NVs The channel statistics is also exposed to the OPC interface The built in Web server allows convenient device configuration through a standard Web browser such as the Internet Explorer or Firefox The Web interface also provides statistics information for system installation and network troubleshooting I Value 15 32 km h Quality good Timestamp 12 25 18 OPC XML DA Ethernet IP IP 852 FT Figure 1 LINX 10X application example with an IP 852 channel The LINX 10X is used for e Exposing CEA 709 network variables NVs and configuration properties CPs as OPC tags e visualization of an CEA 709 network with the supplied LOY TEC L Web software e visualization of an CEA 709 network in an OPC XML DA SCADA package e reading writing and subscribing to CEA 709 NVs CPs via Web services NET e building custom Web pages with active content e browsing data points on the Web interface e supporting standard SNVT SCPT and user defined UNVT UCPT types e scheduling CEA 709 network variables LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 15 LOYTEC e trending data points e generating alarms e logging alarms e sending E Mails on alarms trend logs or scheduled events e network interface for LNS based network management tools LonMaker NL 2
84. version 3 0 0 41 UC e O c 5 4 d LALL Court cart cart Lart C Lartu art RR EE ee ct D ing file system ing TCP IP networking ing FTP server ing Telnet server ing CEA 852 config server ing CEA 852 device ting CEA 709 port 1 FT 10 ing remote LPA ing CEA 709 scanner tarting CEA 709 networking tarting OPC server tarting Web server LINX 101 c LOYTEC electronics GmbH Fri Aug 8 13 54 31 2008 V3 0 0 LOYTEC Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Figure 17 Console messages during the boot phase 4 3 LINX 10X Device Main Menu After booting has completed the LINX 10X displays the console menu as shown in Figure 18 Device Main Menu 1 Show device information 2 Serial firmware upgrade 3 System configuration 4 CEA 709 configuration 5 IP configuration 6 CEA 852 device configuration 7 CEA 852 server configuration 8 Reset configuration factory defaults 9 Device statistics a Data Points 0 Reset device Please choose The menu items are described in the following sections Figure 18 LINX 10X Device Main Menu 4 3 1 Option 1 Show device information Version 3 0 This menu item shows information about the LINX 10X and the current firmware version The output should look like what is shown in Figure 19 LOYTEC e
85. 00 Node ID smomonoiceez IP Address 192 168 2499 Firmware 3 0 0 Model Number 00 Generate Free LNS Options v Automatically create bindings Status Set device offnet Save dynamic Nis Save bindings Update dynamic Mys amp bindings Download the configuration Reboot device Commission device Update device info on Cn rH Boo be Task Progress 1955 Figure 12 Configuration Download Dialog When the configuration process is complete a dialog box is shown which must be acknowledged by clicking Ok Then the LINX 10X is up and running with the new configuration To verify the configuration go to the LINX 10X s Web interface and click on Config and OPC Data Points which brings up the Web page as shown in Figure 13 The list displays current data point values and status Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 24 LOYTEC 3 Data Points Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ay arik T r x n TN pO suchen 5 Favoriten e wi L4 rel 2 Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webui config lgtw_dp folder 0x10e99848 EY Wechseln zu Links Snagit Ez g LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as operator oO Reload Device Info E md sister egi ers Name Dir Type Value State Config O ICEAT09 Port Datapoints Y E E NY tn20Controller_1nvo00temp input analog
86. 0X project file click Remove from Project L Web Project Mame New Project In Project Project Size Project ROM Size 4 06 kB 40 60 kB 0 00 kB 0 00 kB Second Project If you want to remove the L Web project altogether click Remove L Web Project Mame Project Size Project RAM Size New Project 4 06 kB 40 60 kB If you want to export the L Web project into a separate L Web project file click Save to Disk and select a file name in the file requestor dialog If you want to import an L Web project from a separate L Web project file click Load from Disk and select the file in the file requestor dialog The L Web project appears in the project but not on the device L Web Project Mame In Project Mew Project Project Size Project RAI Size 4 06 kB 40 50 kB 0 00 kB 9 3 Using the OPC Bridge 9 3 1 Software Installation Version 3 0 The LOYTEC OPC Bridge software LOPC BR800 is installed as a separate application on a PC A license for the LOY TEC OPC Bridge software must be purchased separately With one software license for the OPC Bridge multiple LINX 10X devices can be accessed With the OPC Bridge software installed each configured LOYTEC LINX 10X device appears as a separate COM DCOM server The OPC Bridge software can be used with LOYTEC LINX OPC servers only The bridge won t connect to third party OPC servers System requirements Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows 2003 Server and Wi
87. 1 100 is member of IP Channel 1 and can be accessed through the Internet The LINX 101 devices with IP addresses 192 168 101 to 192 168 1 110 form another logical IP Channel 2 that communicates with the devices on the IP Channel 1 over the TP 1250 channel which is used in high speed backbone mode for optimum networking performance Note that devices on both IP Channels 1 and 2 can of course connect to the same physical network wiring Furthermore both IP Channels 1 and 2 must have a separate configuration server that manages the LINX 101 devices on the different channels In the example in Figure 136 the LINX 101 with address 192 168 1 100 acts as the configuration server for IP Channel 1 and the LINX 101 with IP address 192 168 1 101 acts as the configuration server for IP Channel 2 8 5 Multi Cast Configuration Version 3 0 IP multi casting is a feature of the IP protocol that allows one packet to be delivered to a group of IP hosts To receive such multi cast packets each IP host must be member of a multi cast group This group is identified by a multi cast address e g 225 0 0 37 and a UDP port number The LINX 101 supports both unicast and multi cast delivery of CNIP data packets Using multi cast is recommended when using the LINX 101 s router in the Smart Switch Mode For those LINX 101s configure a multi cast address in the IP configuration menu Please contact your system administrator to obtain a valid multi cast address for your netw
88. 100 uF 50V 100 uF 50V 105 Q 105 Q 100 uF 50V 100 uF 50V Figure 147 Termination in an FT Bus Topology Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 186 LOYTEC 12 LINX 10X Firmware Update The LINX 10X firmware supports remote upgrade over the network and the serial console To guarantee that the LINX 10X is not destroyed due to a failed firmware update the LINX 10X firmware consists of two images e LINX IOX fallback image e LINX IOX primary image The LINX 10X fallback image cannot be changed Thus if the update of the primary image fails or the image is destroyed by some other means the fallback image is booted and allows reinstalling a valid primary image When the LINX 10X boots up with the fallback image the OPC LED the CEA 709 port LED and the CNIP LED are flashing red 12 1 Firmware Update via the LINX 10X Configurator Version 3 0 The LINX 10X primary image can be updated using the LINX 10X Configurator For this purpose the LINX 10X must be connected to the Ethernet and must have a valid IP configuration see Section 4 6 and 5 2 2 The LINX 10X Configurator must be installed see Section 0 To Update the Firmware using the LINX 10X Configurator 1 Start the LINX 10X Configurator from the Windows Start menu Start gt Programs gt LOYTEC LINX 10X Configuration Configure LINX 10X 2 Select the menu Operations gt Connect to LINX 10X gt FTP This opens the FTP connec
89. 135 23 2 1 Edit Config E System L toca 192 168 24 99 1628 Edit NAT Router 1352321 Save Cancel e 192 168 24 102 1630 x Edit Stats O lip 103 192 168 24 103 1631 x Edit Stats D B CEA 852 C E Mail Data Points B Scheduler Calendar Alarm X unregistered not contacted registered not responding no ext NAT disabled networks under control Statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout E terme Figure 135 Adding a member with extended NAT Mode on the Web UI 8 4 3 Multiple IP 852 devices behind a NAT Classic Method If more than one LINX 101 must be used behind the NAT router and there are devices which do not support the extended NAT mode we propose the setup from Figure 136 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 158 LOYTEC IP 192 168 1 100 NAT 135 23 2 1 Configuration i Server for Firewall NAT Router KAR mE i M me IP Channel 1 IP Channel 1 u m 135 23 2 1 192 168 1 1 IP 192 168 1 101 Configuration Server for Forward ports 1628 and 1629 oe IP Channel 2 Internet to IP address 192 168 1 100 il e TP 1250 m High speed back bone mode IP 192 168 1 102 LIX ace m FT 10 IP 192 168 1 103 IP Channel 2 L INX Aud er m Figure 136 Application that uses multiple LINX 101 devices behind a NAT router firewall The LINX 101 with IP address 192 168
90. 2 CBS IMBRE m UU T T NT 143 7 11 4 Download Trend Data in CSV Format eeeeeeeeeeeee 144 TIL Deliver end Data Via E MOIT aote intotu tibt eee petat Rap iet etus 144 7 11 6 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Trends ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 145 T12 Remote AST ODJI6CIS 53er DL ie ne diel Nannini 145 7 12 1 Remote Scheduler and C aleBOat zuo cup Eosiette sss tibi Pita d eam iniia 145 BIZZ Alam C THO Susie robe imn itc obomstek e e utens nca M abun utote ce e e Mantente 146 TAS EESTI 147 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 9 LOYTEC EXE GE UEBER 147 7 12 2 Editine 3 MIMD EC eae deo a Poet etti e v LI 148 S The LINX IOL ROUGE risici enaner Lo ese a e a opea a e eb NOE 0S 149 SL CEA MI ROU eA 149 Scll Copisured Router Mode oti E ctiaseasiasscucoaeiatigeidateaneeouwwiadans 150 S T S matt SWITCH MOS aiia ms es toc Uto dest eee up as medie uerum UEd 150 5 1 5 SStore and Porward Repeater oo ei espe DIU HEINE UM aes 151 8 1 4 Smart Switch Mode with No Subnet Broadcast Flooding 151 8 2 CEA 852 Device of the ROUter 00 0000ccerscorscnnsorscsonsonsscnnsssoscnssnesennsoees 151 8 3 Configuration Server for Managing the IP 852 Channel 152 SE OVINI EN n T A A AE TA AEE A AEO 152 8 3 2 Configuration Server Contacts IP 852 Device eeeeeeeessssss 153 8 3 3 P 852 Device Contacts Configuration Server
91. 20 e remote LPA functionality e communicating on CEA 709 with either FT 10 or CEA 852 IP channel on the Intranet Internet e connecting to a high performance backbone using existing IP infrastructure e configuration server for IP 852 devices 1 2 LINX 100 LINX 101 Version 3 0 OPC XML DA OPC XML DA IP 852 RNI Figure 2 LINX 100 versus LINX 101 The LINX 100 and the LINX 101 are both capable of exposing CEA 709 network variables and configuration properties to OPC XML DA Depending on additional features there are flavors of the product Figure 2 depicts the differences The LINX 101 possesses a router between the CEA 852 interface IP 852 and the FT 10 interface The built in router can be used behind NAT routers and firewalls which allows seamless integration in already existing Intranet networks It supports DHCP even with changing IP addresses in an Intranet environment The CEA 852 interface can be used to connect the LINX 101 to an IP based high speed backbone The LINX 101 s router can be used as a standard CEA 709 configured router or it can be used as a self learning plug amp play router based on the high performance well proven routing core from our L Switch plug amp play multi port router devices smart switch mode The self learning router doesn t need a network management tool for configuration but is a true plug amp play and easy to use IP infrastructure component The LINX 100 can be configure
92. 20 21 22 23 2d 25 25 27 28 20 3n Preview All June 2008 5M TW TF S 123455858 7 8 8 1D 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2T 28 29 30 September 2008 October 2008 November 2008 December 2008 SoM TW TF S 12345 8 Y 8 9 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2n 2 27 23 24 25 25 27 28 20 30 31 C Preview Selected July 2005 SoM TW TF S 12345 6G 7 8 9 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 2D 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 January 2009 SM TW TFS 123 4 5 amp T 8 9 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 12344 amp 7 Save Changes Cancel Figure 121 Configure Calendar Pattern Dialog 6 Click Save Changes when all exception days have been entered When not sure how a date configuration affects the calendar days click on a pattern in the Pattern Entries list and the affected days will be highlighted in the Preview 7 9 7 Using the Local Scheduler Once the setup of the local scheduler is done it is basically operational It will immediately start to work based on the configuration data downloaded through the configuration software You can verify the daily schedules and values of scheduled data points on the Web UI see Section 5 2 10 The local schedule can be altered over the Web UI or using the network technology of the port where the scheduler has been created 7 9 8 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Schedulers Version 3 0 CEA 709 schedulers and t
93. 65 tx collisions 0 tx bid errors 0 tx wait for rdy4tx 0 tx rdy4tx 0 tx underrun errors 0 tx dropped 2 tx resends 0 int swint req 2094 int swint res 2094 pnt lockup 0 interrupts 3189 KKKKKKKKKKKK MBUF STATISTICS KKKKKKKKKKKK mbufs 512 clusters 64 free 14 drops 0 waits 0 drains 0 free 461 data 51 header 0 socket 0 Dpobs0 rtable 0 htable 0 atable 0 soname 0 soopts 0 ftable 0 rights 0 ifaddr 0 control 0 oobdata 0 KKKKKKKKKKKK IP Statistics Ckck ck ck k ck ck kk total packets received 922 datagrams delivered to upper level 922 total ip packets generated here 158 Destination Gateway Mask Hw Flags Refs Use Expire Interface default 192 168 0 1 UGS 6 0 0 ethO0 DA ues T 192 168 0 1 UGH 0 1 3606 ethO0 62 178 95 96 192 168 0 1 UGH 0 1 3606 ethO0 91 109 145 243 192 1569204 UGH 0 1 3606 ethO0 81 109 251 36 192 168 0 1 UGH 0 1 3606 ethO0 l2 2D l272040 1 UH 0 0 0 lol 130 140 10 21 192 168 0 1 UGH 1 6 0 ethO0 192 168 0 0 2552994295940 U 0 0 3 ethO 192 168 0 1 00 04 5A 26 96 1F UHL 7 0 1722 ethO0 213 18 80 166 192 168 0 1 UGH 1 148 0 ethO KKKKKKKKKKKK TCP Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKKKKKKK UDP Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKK total input packets 924 total output packets 158 KKKKKKKKKKKK ICMP Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKK Figure 45 IP Statistics The IP statistics menu has the additional feature of displaying any IP address conflicts If the LINX 10X s IP address conflicts with another host on the net
94. 7 LOZ CBAs TOS Interlace scios e E EE boda 178 10 2 INN Ipo PG ergen 002000905909 1383065 18100002 02 REID Ob Eust 178 102 NN TONO nom Lo 179 10 2 3 Real Time Keeper ODJe6t i 2 dde eth oo o dne d obs beutsotass 180 102 4 Channel Monitor Objecto ete ePi Caceres aaa ates 181 10 2 dl ndar DIG OE uoc eh OE deti utat a dv bor bade tuve enn a co eats 183 10 22 06 Schedulet ODIeebusidiesescs vibus a bao ensauiwuancanenbendontoomssabes 183 10 2 hents OD EC e os tr Saetc repe a tento anco eaaet a a Lt aeneo 184 iw Grate CARO Mr 1e 184 II Network Medidor ea ada eu Enos baa repe EHE P Eco ae Urea es C evo a Een EEE 185 LE P E d eec 185 12 LINX 10X Firmware Update eee Ion e eoa eto eene aee hee ea Pe aun eee t aeos pens 186 12 1 Firmware Update via the LINX 10X Configurator 186 12 2 Firmware Update via the Console ecce ee ee eere eee eerte eeee 187 13 Baume M 190 I3 l Technical SuppOLt outil ree aaa ea bU Tin y tnr ssessbendeuestisvestetdsvecess 190 Id Application Notes 55 edere eye te ER POR RAE EXER EYE NOR IR EORR EDEN 191 ILL Ue ESD LT00L z inar eoru o xe EL repe IEEE LE ez o R 191 14 2 Use of Static Dynamic and External NVs on a Device 191 15 Eirmware Versions eoe cce i e Pv a od bo Eu aves euh coo vv Y ca Puede aa 192 16 SDCCMICATIONS ceo cot usu udo urne ee EE io ee ea tet oie d open eadera ot eoe to E T
95. CI CE rm 54 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 6 LOYTEC AIA VODIO S 5et Valle ie eit risus isesb euet isa det ves vu bt visuded vest oues ig det apev obi bus 54 3 Wep InteridCG ciii torti iae deri notet eoa oo Core e Ede De eto eia Posi 6o Eoo rai do queo 55 5 1 Device Information and Account Manageme n ccsscccscccccccssssssssssssees 55 5 2 Device ConfiPurdtiOIl eonia pee eo co rv de ever ETE E S AETS S8 95 2 1 System GOonfrourallOD oen cid erae Led o ER EE HE EBEN dex UE LU pet po POE Rao 58 2 22 MPSS OM OUT AMON 2 ooo dediortus d eb oec dede edoctus deba o aeuo p odi soetateca dees 59 23 225 J iackup and RESO uet ated usbuied tei asit coast aspis uei C Iced 61 See CEA TOS Conis urati o o o oerte e putt i ctetu iat need 62 52 3 CES 709 Router CODD S UPADIOTIES seins conse Dco toin oe bob ade pese go pe E Rau e evt Nub aos 63 3250 X EA 852 Device CONC Ulall OM sc uico ert eisa ces a oed waits 64 5 2 7 CEA 852 Server Conftg tatlOfi euer eer tole cce Podio datos 66 3 2 CEA 852 Channel ESSE use d eot EORR E ebat e i esee 68 x MAD ICE EN E UE UT 69 SNR IUE Scilla T Ls 71 SN OIN DIEERE DU LEM 73 22 12 SAEI oin testi estet AE Ue TE o M me ee eu 73 3 2 T9 E Mal Con UP ATION oe cross tole dowssterescabieh dave S 74 5 3 DeCVICESCAUISUICS I M 75 Dele Poa CS PL
96. Configure Schedule dialog and click on the Configuration tab see Section 7 9 4 Select the day for which to configure a daily schedule Weekly Exception Schedule Configuration Weekday Exception Mon Events Use CISESISISISUSII cO co oc oO oOo oOo oO oO 1 thighest LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 134 LOYTEC 3 Select a value preset in the Available Data Presets box on the upper right hand side 4 Drag and drop the preset from this list into the time table area to define the desired output values on the day schedule Daily Schedule re pr oroe 11 a0 5 Completed daily schedules may be copied to other days using the Copy to button For example the Monday may serve as the template for a regular work day and be copied to Tuesday till Friday Then click Ok Copy Daily Schedule x Source Monday Select Targets Daily Schedule wednesday Thursday To Use Exception Days 1 Select a calendar pattern which shall be used as an exception day and place a checkmark on it Sun ca do Holiday s 1 highest v 2 Edit the daily schedule E 5 Maintenance OO 99 00 00 00 Default 01 00 uw 3 If more than one calendar pattern is used edit the priorities For example if a given calendar day falls in both categories Holidays and Maintenance the exception day with the higher priority becomes effective on that day Th
97. Device settings Passwords IP settings E Mail config etc e Data point configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 62 LOYTEC e CEA 709 binding information e AST settings e Webconfiguration and custom Web pages e Backup Restore Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Qaa O x A Dawe reme OC d LI S Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webuifconfig backup EJ wechseln zu Links LOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin amp Snagit E Backup Configuration Device Info Press the backup linkto download the current configuration and store it as a file on your computer Config m System E P L Passwords Backup Restore B CEA 709 m E Mail Data Points B Scheduler E Calendar Alarm Restore Configuration To restore a configuration select the backup file e g backup zip and press the Restore button Filename Durchsuchen Restore Statistics networks under control L Web Reset Contact Logout s terete Figure 56 Backup Restore page 5 2 4 CEA 709 Configuration Version 3 0 On the CEA 709 configuration page shown in Figure 57 the user can configure which of the available CEA 709 ports of the LINX 10X shall be active Select CEA 709 from the drop down box to use the LINX 10X on a FT 10 channel or CEA 852 to use the LINX 10X on an IP channel Click on the tables CEA 709 and
98. E T b sun Ades sand 163 9 15 25 Dita POolfit enses ico oss iL i scsetes terre oT nO Ty On ie cote dried 164 DVD AS POUCA 2 223 22 2002 907 2 02202225022 0220228922200 E bao ado ER CTS 167 MEME UTILE E L2 m 169 02 Createa NEW L Web Project sien dd optet iod drame eode obtuse pt Ro dede 170 9 2 2 Starta Graphical E Web Desi gi one utet eta osos eet vues 171 0 2 3 Orsanize D Web PEOIeCES usine boe dt pedi vada EAEE 171 93 Usmg the OPC DBEIU9e iiid escis pee aita Ev akaone ov bre oho ie Cer dO e Rees bien ate 172 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 10 LOYTEC Version 3 0 9 Sowar InstalldtIOfl cc iciecoscsnenconcestecnsnntetaes guepot espe eoadeU e eat en enu d Ue aot UR DUE 172 9 5 2 amp onteutrethieBridbe Locally s i oo PUE alee EU MS IUMM 173 9 3 3 Export OPC Servers for another PC eeessssssseeeeeeeeeenee 173 9 3 4 Import OPC Servers Using the Configurator esseeeeesss 174 9 3 5 Manually Configure Servers ier i PLE Ev EET ERE URL EHE nent 174 9 4 Using Custom Web P3968 enit eo aeos Poe eei ERE E eEeE Gee rea etae Terisedrereaa 175 10 Operating INteriace e S 176 IOL Common INt ria Ce oie E Ere E lenin lank 176 10 1 1 Schedule and Calendar XML Files oo ccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 176 IOS Trend LOS CSV Pile ioesecenielerco meto E N 176 IOL Ahm LOr CSV dri T M 17
99. E vei mu T e M di DM iu PauE 13 1 2 LINX T007 LINX IOL uiii ei ecoti ee ecobuad se o edob oki e dong eY E e ePa Rayo ide eno P e een ENSS 15 E3 COMO e 16 2 QuickStart eli 17 2 1 Hardware Installatioll iion diees e thats edek Cdp eh cp binas dep Ca PVP CEU issostni osie 17 2 2 Configuration of the LINX 10X essecoccsssssssssscccccccococsossssesseceececcocosssssssssseeee 17 2 2 1 IP Configuration on the Console ccccccccccceeecceeceeeaeesseeseseeeeeeeeeeeees 18 2 2 2 IP Configuration via the Web Interface essen 19 2 5 Configuration with LNS based Tools ecce eee e eere eee eee eene nen uu 21 2 4 Connect with an OPC XML DA Client eee eese eese eee eene n nun 24 3 Hardware Msta latio cesis iiieeu dodo eoi Dee aea o cao eiu eo ei toe d aestu eua ed do eode ees 25 EA MEE DJ M 25 Sol CINA AOX scu eue QU ap nnde qu de Durban metum uu be S 25 32 Jrodu ct babel Ho etin eet aoreet ee E eo o UE 26 3 9 MOURLUIIS dieit Lira ederet aeo eiua ibi eleva ede ku sias stus eV aar vele Eara RE 26 3 4 LEDSNA S ziii oett e eo eit ede ree red eve dv M eov Ee eR UUS 26 S NND ONDE elcdivenecaotes 26 5 2 2 SATU SLE Donuts ctctdeni tad e tan edu ced Vect cado es AR Lo iet oti eti oa didi 26 Ae FOIE QUII OLD NRI C c NL 26 344 TEACUV
100. EC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 18 LOYTEC 1 Setup IP configuration see Sections 2 2 1 and 2 2 2 2 Setup the OPC configuration see Section 2 3 Note This setup procedure assumes the use of the IP interface Alternatively a configuration via the console interface is possible See Chapter 4 for details 2 2 1 IP Configuration on the Console Use a PC terminal program with the communication settings set to 38 400 bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit no handshake To connect COMI of the PC to the Console on the LINX 10X use a standard null modem cable with full handshaking Power up the LINX 10X or press Return if the LINX 10X is already running The following menu should appear on the terminal Device Main Menu Show device information Serial firmware upgrade System configuration CEA 709 configuration IP configuration CEA 852 device configuration CEA 852 server configuration Reset configuration factory defaults Device statistics 000 10 014 C0 ho 2S Data Points ie 0 Reset device Please choose Figure 4 LINX 101 Main Menu Select 5 from the LINX 10X Configuration Menu and enter the IP address netmask and gateway address Note that you must use different IP addresses if you are using multiple LINX 10X in your setup IP Configuration Menu 1 DHCP disabled 2 IP Address 192 168 24 99 ieee IP Netmask fs xeu D Dr deu wl 4 IP Gateway 192 168 1 1
101. Earth Position This menu item allows to configure the LINX 10X s earth position This setting defines the longitude latitude and elevation of the device on the planet This setting is used for an astronomical clock For fixed locations such as a building the position can be entered in this menu see Figure 22 For moving locations this setting can be updated over the network using the network variable nciEarthPos see Section 10 2 2 Earth Position Configuration Menu 1 Set latitude 2 48 13 14 N 2 Set longitude o LG S20 05 3 Set altitude 200 m q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 22 Configure Earth Position The latitude and longitude are entered through menu items 2 and 3 as degrees minutes and seconds The altitude or elevation is entered in menu item 3 in meters from sea level FTP server 8 FTP server port This menu option allows enabling and disabling the FTP server and configuring the FTP server port Press 7 to toggle between enabled and disabled Press 8 to change the FTP server port To use the default port enter 0 when asked for the port number The FTP server can be used to download a data point configuration or update the firmware see Section 12 1 Web server 0 Web server port These menu items allow enabling and disabling the Web server and configuring the Web server port on the LINX 10X You can disable the Web server
102. Enter gt When prompted enter the IP address of the second NTP server and press lt Enter gt To clear an NTP server s address leave the respective IP address blank and press lt Enter gt The NTP server information will be used to synchronize the system time if the NTP time source has been selected in the system configuration menu see Section 4 3 3 The text appended to this menu item displays the current NTP synchronization status out of sync or in sync Link Speed amp Duplex If the LINX 10X is operated with an old 10Mbit s only hub the link speed should be switched from Auto Detect to lOMbps Half Duplex With modern 100 10Mbit s switches this setting can be left at its default Auto Detect Change Link Speed amp Duplex 1 Auto Detect default 2 100Mbps Full Duplex 3 100Mbps Half Duplex 4 10Mbps Full Duplex 5 10Mbps Half Duplex 4 7 CEA 852 Device Configuration Menu Version 3 0 This menu holds relevant information regarding the configuration of the CEA 852 device In principle there are two ways to add the LINX 10X to an IP channel The recommended method is to enter the information at the configuration server The configuration server will then contact the LINX 10X and configure the relevant information If for some reason the LINX 10X shall contact the configuration server on its own behalf e g as an auto member one can enter the configuration data directly into this menu Then
103. Extended CEA 852 Device Statistics Session ID Ox4dce9e98 SNTP synchronized no Number of CR member infos a Current channel routing mode GCR Message alloc count 2a p Dropped failed authentication 0 Dropped invalid frame 0 Dropped out of sequence 0 Dropped duplicates 0 Dropped missing timestamp su Active DC datetime 0x00000000 Active CM datetime 0x00000000 Active SL datetime 0x00000000 Stale DC messages 0 Stale CM messages 0 Stale SL messages 0 Stale CR messages 0 Number of DC updates 0 Number of CM updates 0 Number of SL updates 0 Number of CR updates 0 CR packets sent to CS 0 Clear CEA 852 device 1 statistics y n Figure 41 Extended CEA 852 Device Statistics 4 11 2 Option 1b RNI Device Statistics A sample console output is shown in Figure 42 The first part displays RNI device statistics which are part of the standard and are comparable to e g the i LON 600 Press y to go on to extended statistics RNI Device Statistics Seconds since cleared 21 Date Time of clear GMT Tue Jun 17 11 01 13 2008 No of members 3 LT Packets received 0 LT Bytes received lt unknown gt LT Packets sent sx LT Bytes sent lt unknown gt IP Packets sent 0 IP Bytes sent 0 IP Packets received 0 IP Bytes received 0 IP Packets data sent 0 IP Packets data received 0 LT Stale packets 0 RFC Packets sent 0 RFC Packets received 0 Avg aggregation to IP un
104. F files are copied into the LNS import directory If you are using multiple databases projects make sure you have registered the plug in in each project 5 Under LonMaker gt Network Properties gt Plug In Registration make sure that the LOYTEC LINX 100 Configurator Version 3 0 shows up under Already Registered Network Properties E E X Authentication Domain Timing LonMiaker Options Remote Lightweight Client Access Permission Lightweight Client Options Naming Server Location Network Interface Resource File Languages Logon Plug in Registration Plug in Registration El Nat Registered Register H Echelon LNS Report Generator Version 3 20 Echelon Lanhaker XML Interface version 3 20 Deregister H LOYTEC Gateway Configuration Utility version 3 0 17 j LOYTEC XIF Builder version 1 4 07 j LP A ConvPlugin version 2 21 Epistle P0 beL Vig Configuration Version 3 1 1 ORION Firmware Loader Version 1 0 i f Disable El Already Registered Echelon LonMaker Browser version 3 20 ES LOY TEC LINK 100 Configurator version 3 033 R i j j i H Disabled move i Mot Installed Locally Skip this prompt when re opening this drawing Register all new plug ins when re opening this drawing Abbrechen ermehmen Hilfe Figure 80 Double check that the LINX 10X Configurator is properly registered LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 02 LOYTEC 7 1 3 Operat
105. For external this property defines the repeat timer in milliseconds The default is 96 ms Transmit Timer For external this property defines the transmit timer in milliseconds The default is 768 ms LNS Network Path If available from an LNS scan this property specifies the LNS network path of the device where the given NV exists LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 97 7 3 Project Settings 7 3 1 General LOYTEC LNS Channel Name If available from an LNS scan this property specifies the LNS channel name of the device where the given NV exists The project settings allow defining certain default behavior and default settings used throughout the project To access the project settings go to the menu Settings gt Project Settings This opens the project settings dialog which provides several tabs as described in the following sections The general tab of the project settings as shown in Figure 82 contains settings independent of the technology port The settings are Project Settings f General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA709 CEA709 asr Project Mame Unnamed Project Default FTP Connection Settings Username admin Password admin OPC Bridge Automatically add downloaded device to the OPC bridge Figure 82 General Project Settings 7 3 2 Data Point Naming Rules Version 3 0 Project Name This setting allows entering a descriptive name for the project Default FTP Connection Set
106. ID LED uates eee eet ats Asien teal elias 21 54 5 Hihemet Cink IDEs itiaoi ei REPE osito Ita 27 3 4 6 Ethernet Activity LED uu aie eot to oua o E Eee ER PRU F Ied a thea 21 E SINR CED e a a a a t die obiecto d bus 24 Oe AIR INET I cM c RR 28 SAD Wi ANC ON in serate a te GRA reese i tea tero tas ere ta Ibo dodo fua de edad 28 3 2 T0 Network DrastiOSLICSC 1osc0i sasevinoaerthewton cations 2 on n e EEn 28 3 9 Status DUtCO i vei n r Da Prose cesses S a Dv LEER Ee EE REGE 28 3 5 1 Resetting Forwarding Tables ecrini 29 36 DIP Switch SetUllgs uiii e od epo aee rune ei Eea do Le nao NATARE ANENE 29 3 7 VO deje R 29 SX MENS OUCIBE ree rc 30 CR MMR dian TUR 30 4 Console Interfd6e uoce dioe one oet voee these NP UR etu eo Ev T e sae pese o poca to oaei ia 32 x Eee me M 32 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 4 LOYTEC AD Selb Test m 32 4 3 LINX IO0X Device Main Menu ioo rebese uo euka a run ako a eRsk Seba buxo RR e REV esame ako rus 33 4 3 1 Option 1 Show device information essen 33 4 3 2 Option 2 Serial firmware upgrade sees 34 4 3 3 Option 3 System configuration sssssssseseeeeeeenenn nennen 34 4 3 4 Option 4 CEA 709 configuration eessssseseeeeeeeeeen nnn 34 4 3 5 Option 5 IP configuration eessessseeeeeeeeeenenene eene nnn
107. INX 10X Make sure that the Web server has not been disabled in the console interface see Section 4 4 4 Note that if your PC has an IP address in a subnet other than 192 168 1 xxx you must open a command tool and enter the following route command to add a route to the LINX 10X To Add a Route to the Device I 2 Windows START gt Run Enter cmd an click Ok In the command window enter the command line route add 192 168 1 254 SCOMPUTERNAME Then open your Web browser and type in the default IP address 192 168 1 254 The device information page should appear as shown in Figure 50 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 56 LOYTEC E Device Info Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras 7 Qaa O d Alps ernn OS i JAS Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webui device infojdevice info EJ wechselnzu Links amp Snaglt E DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as operator Product name LINX 101 Product code LINX 101 Firmware LINX 10x Primary Image Version 3 0 0 Build date Fri Aug 8 13 54 31 2008 Serial number 008701 80000001 C686 Free memory 5757 K 457K System temperature 43 7 C Supply voltage 15 8 Router Info CEA 709 unique node ID 80 0000 01 C6 85 IP unique node ID 80 00 00 01 C6 88 Status Online Send Service Pin Message CEA 709 80 00 00 01 C6 87 I Send Service Pin Message goahead WEBSERVER Device Info Config Statistics L We
108. INX 10X User s Manual 113 LOYTEC the current connection information and manually created dynamic NVs and schedules are uploaded Configuration Upload l Device Information Mame uns 110 Subnet o Channel Channel 1 Made o7 Pragram ID 5000078404540402 IF Address 192 166 38 2 Mode ID 800000058c7C Firmware 1 0 0 Dynamic Nw Synchronization Upload Progress D So Control Abort Close Figure 102 Configuration upload dialog v Automatically sync local dynamic Nis Target Pork All ports scanned via IP connection 3 When asked if schedules shall be uploaded also click Yes if you want the current schedule configuration be extracted from the device Note that when doing so the original schedules in the project are replaced by the uploaded schedules 4 If dynamic NVs were synchronized click on Finish 7 7 4 Scanning for Network Variables When the LINX 10X Configurator is connected to an LNS database network variables can be scanned in from that data base To scan network variables from the LNS database 1 Click on the Datapoints tab __ File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web DOeER SUB hea dre N Connected Device inx100 test3 Subsystem Linx Channel FT 10 Statistics L Web Projects 2 Click on the button T Scan channel This scans in all NVs on all devices connected to the CEA 709 channel of the LINX 10X 3 After the scan has completed the folder
109. IP address field Enter the public address of the NAT router in the NAT address field Modify the port as needed For example to add the LINX 101 with port 1631 in Figure 133 enter the values as shown in Figure 134 CEA 852 Member Menu 1 IP Address 192 168 1 103 2 Port 1631 3 NAT Address ti ee ae 4 Device name lip 103 q Quit without saving x Exit and save Figure 134 Adding a member with extended NAT Mode on the console UI In the Web UI add the members with their private IP addresses and the client ports as defined by the port forwarding Then select the added member by checking the check box and select the action Assign to NAT Enter the public NAT address of the NAT router An example to add the two IP 852 devices in Figure 133 through the Web UI is depicted in Figure 135 To remove a device from a NAT router but not delete it select it and choose Remove from NAT as the action Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 157 LOYTEC Z CEA 852 Channel List Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Zur ck T ix a A pP Suchen Se Favoriten Ol v jv rel A Adresse E http 192 168 24 99 webui config eia amp S2chlist Wechseln zu Links amp Snagit E LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Device Info Add Device Reload Recontact Action on Selected Execute No Name IP Address Stat Flags NAT Router
110. J Datapoints 21 Items T i Alarm 1 Items 2 v Calendar 1 Items ee Scheduler 10 Items 2 From the data points in the import folder select the scheduler objects you are interested in and click the Use on Device speed button This creates suitable remote scheduler and the corresponding calendar objects in the Remote Devices folder E Remote Devices f snnannnzdasa E Scheduler 1 Items ff Calendar 1 Items 3 Adjust the basic settings for the newly created objects such as the object name and description The object name will be used as the name for the scheduler as seen on the Web UI Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 146 LOYTEC Note Note 4 A static NV is created to receive information from the remote device about changes to the scheduler configuration so that the local device does not need to poll the remote device Set a name for this NV default is nviSchedLink lt number gt and assign it to a suitable function block Due to the static input NV which is required for a remote CEA709 scheduler object adding remote scheduler points will change the static interface of the device The new static input NV representing the remote calendar on the local device this NV is normally called nviCalLink needs to be bound to the output NV called nvoCalLink located in the Calendar functional block of the remote device and the new static nviSchedLink NVs which were created for
111. LINX 10X It has been implemented as an NV to make other devices send that configuration to the LINX 10X over the network e g from a GPS device e nviClearStat SNVT switch When writing 100 0 1 to this NV the channel monitor objects statistics data are cleared e nvoUpTime SNVT elapsed tm This NV contains the elapsed time since the last reboot 10 2 3 Real Time Keeper Object When the scheduler objects are enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes the standard LONMARK real time keeper object Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 181 LOYTEC 10 2 4 Channel Monitor Object Figure 145 shows the Channel Monitor Object functional block This functional block is responsible for network monitoring There is one object for each channel the LINX 10X is attached to The channel monitor object with index 0 corresponds to the FT port of the LINX 10X while the object with index 1 corresponds to the IP 852 port of the LINX 10X If a port is not available in the current system configuration the nvoElapsedTime is set to the invalid value and nvoPort is set to 255 Version 3 0 Each object has the following network variables nvoPort SNVT count Index of port associated with this Channel Monitor Object instance Port 1 corresponds to the FT port of the LINX IOX while port 2 corresponds to the IP 852 port of the LINX 10X If the monitored port is not available in a system configuration the value
112. MAC cuore oa s M darc Media Access Control ITE ote oues uide decas Message Digest 5 a secure hash function see Internet RFC 1321 ipu em Network Address Translation see Internet RFC 1631 INI sateen es ab odes tea Network Variable Queer TEN Open Process Control ISIN enan Remote Network Interface Sal HA T Round Trip Time Bios DUE IM Send List SMTP ute erences Simple Mail Transfer Protocol calf i Cerne reer ener rere ener Simple Network Time Protocol SONS xtti i oM Uds Standard Network Variable Type SO aes S es Secure Socket Layer TES esent t tse ei Transport Layer Security AME ost mte deeds dba eXtensible Markup Language LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 13 LOYTEC 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview Version 3 0 The LINX 10X is a high performance reliable and secure network infrastructure component that contains an embedded OPC server and exposes a defined set of data points as OPC tags It implements the OPC XML DA standard which lets OPC clients access the data points via Web services The LINX 10X can provide up to 1000 OPC tags Which native data points are exposed to OPC can be configured by a configuration software which provides a fast and easy way to configure the LINX 10X Using the supplied L Web designer users can easily generate a Web based visualization for the LINX 10X Easy to understand diagnostic LEDs allow installers and system integrators to install and troubleshoot this device without expert
113. Missed since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset e nvoMaxPkts SNVT count 532 Maximum value of nvolvalPkts since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset e nvolvalMisPre SNVT count 32 Number of missed preambles per second on the associated channel measured during the last interval A missed preamble is detected whenever the link layer receives a preamble which is shorter then the defined preamble length A large number in this counter is usually due to noise on the channel e nvolotalMisPre SNVT count 32 Total number of missed preambles per second on the associated channel measured since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset e nvoMaxMisPre SNVT count 32 Maximum value of nvolvalMisPre since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset e nvoChnlAlarm SNVT switch Signals an overload alarm condition of the channel during the last statistic interval A channel can be overloaded due to one of the following conditions o The bandwidth utilization during the last statistic interval nvolvalBandUtl exceeded the limit defined by the SCPThighLimit default 70 OR o The CRC Error Rate during the last statistic interval nvolvalCrcErr exceeded the limit defined by the SCPThighLimit default 5 OR o The Missed Packets Rate during the last statistic interval nvolvalMissed was not zero OR o The Missed Preamble Rate during the last statistic
114. NV Ap CEA 703 LAS Scan 1 v In MV Enz contraller 1nvo temp nvidObemp nva temp EE us l n mM Qut Mv Enz controller 1nvi itemp nva itemp nvititemp e M od temel 3 mM In Mv Enz controller 1nva zlux nviazlux rva glux j En 3 CEA709 Templates 4 mM Qut Mv Enz controller 1nvit3lux nvab3lux nevitralux E 0 LIMNx 10 0 2 v In Mv Enz controller 1nvo d4lev percent nvitdlev percent nva4lev per vee System Registers 9 Items 6 M Qut MV tnZ0Controller_invidSley percent nvo 5lev percent nviti5lev perc i t User Registers 0 Items T m MV Enz contraller invo 6temp f nvili6temp F nvaltemp f ES sais iiis B mM Qut MV Enz controller 1nvi zEemp F nva zbemp F nvitdztemp F 1 Datapoints 8 Items had i1 Calendar 0 Items off Scheduler 0 Items 1 1 Alarm 0 Items iud J Trend 0 Items oof Statistics 18 Items bus Remote Devices WW Global Objects j s 9 E Mail Configuration 0 Items fl Math Object Configuration 0 Items be 3 Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items 1 LOYTEC Configurator ready a Figure 11 NVs used for OPC tags on the LINX 10X This opens the Configuration Download dialog as depicted in Figure 12 Then press Start The tasks executed are displayed and their progress is visualized by the progress bar below Configuration Download CEA 709 Port l Target Device Information Mame linx Channel channel FT 1 Subnet 2 Node Co Program ID 90000746168404
115. OGSTATE 0 BOOL 1 REAL 2 ENUM 3 UNSIGNED 4 SIGNED 5 NULL 7 ERROR 8 TIMECHANGE 9 Error Time This field is valid for records of type ERROR Change Log Status TIMECHANGE and LOGSTATUS Data point source identifier Indexes into logger entry header For value lines in a multi column CSV this field indexes the first column which has a value For the ERROR record type the field indexes the data source that caused the error For LOGSTATE TIMECHANGE records this field is not applicable and can be left at zero Date Time 2007 11 02 15 34 22 The date ime of the log record This is in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS 5000 Logged value from source n 1 or empty NNI a a Table 10 Columns of the Trend Log CSV File There are as many value columns as value sources specified in the header If at a given date time more values are logged all of them appear in the same line If at that given time some sources did not log values those columns are left empty The Source column in a multi value CSV refers to the first data source that supplied a value in a given line 10 1 3 Alarm Log CSV File Version 3 0 The historical alarm logs are also accessible as CSV formatted files The alarm log CSV files are accessible either via their UID only or in combination with contents of the alarm log object name The files are located in LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 178 LOYTEC tmp uid all
116. OPC tag contains the value of the data point and some of its meta data as available in OPC An example of browsing the OPC tags on the LINX 10X is shown in Figure 139 The OPC quality property of a given OPC tag is coupled to the data point status If a data point is offline or unreliable the OPC quality property changes to uncertain LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 9 1 2 1 Analog 165 LOYTEC pg amp J OPC Server Gl Test LINX TIT 99 Gy Semeritems u 0 ap System Registers z icy AlarmmLags Figure 139 Client browsing the OPC tag namespace on a LINX 10X Analog data points are exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For each analog data point an OPC tag is created The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties e Item Canonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 5 Double e Item Value Double The present data point value e tem Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable e Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update e Item Access Rights Integer This property defines if the tag is read only or read write e tem Description String This is the description of the data point e Item EU Type Integer This property is
117. Oo i amp IP Configuration Device Info ut Goto IP Configuration to set DNS server 4 5 Outgoing e mail server SMTP mgate chello at U Outgoing e mail server port 25 T Source e mail address flinx_100 chello at Send Test E Mail 4 Source e mail sender name Manual C Reply e mail address opt huber aon atl Send Test E Mail E Mail server user name B Data Points V nava empty to disable authentification m Scheduler gt E Mail server password ees ess E Calendar O m Alarm lt Save Settings Get Settings Statistics QU C L Web Reset Contact Logout gi Fertig P a nterne a Figure 68 E Mail Configuration Page 5 3 Device Statistics The device statistics pages provide advanced statistics information about the CEA 709 device the CEA 852 device the System Log the scheduler the Alarm Log and the Ethernet interface 5 3 1 IP Statistics Figure 69 shows the IP statistics page It allows to find possible problems related to the IP communication Specifically any detected IP address conflicts are displayed if the LINX 10X s IP address conflicts with a different host on the network Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 76 LOYTEC Statistics IP Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Que O x A A Pater remm Oo od JAS Adresse ei http 192 168 24 98 webuijstatistics ip Wechseln zu Links amp SnagIt Ej
118. PC Bridge v Automatically add downloaded device to the OPC bridge Figure 141 Enable bridge export in the project settings Put a check mark on Automatically add downloaded device to the OPC bridge Click Ok Downloading the configuration also makes the LINX 10X available as a COM OPC server through the local bridge 9 3 3 Export OPC Servers for another PC Version 3 0 L 3 If the bridge software is not installed locally on the same PC as where the LINX 10X configuration is created it must be exported to make the OPC server information available The exported file can then be transferred to the OPC bridge To Export the Bridge Configuration Open the LINX 10X Configurator 2 Connectto the LINX 10X which shall be available in the bridge Select the menu File Export to OPC Bridge LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 174 LOYTEC 4 Inthe OPC Bridge Device Properties dialog as shown in Figure 142 add information which is not default i e Min update rate Wait time and Hold Time If the operator user has a non default password enter the password 5 Click Export to File OPC Bridge Device Properties X COM Server Parameters Server caption My First LINX 100 Server name LEER Pies MPIC See e EHE 70AE95C4 FCEF 4945 414E 675636263D72 SML Server Parameters Server URL httpf192 168 24 9980 DA 000 Proxy User name operator 0000000 Password operator 00000000 Min update
119. Save Changes Cancel 9 Add output data points by clicking the Add Output DP button Add Output DP Remove Output DP Output Datapoint Datapoint Path mv register Write LIN 100 User Registers 10 In the data point selector dialog select the output data points and click Ok 11 To create the math object click Create 7 13 2 Editing a Math Object Math objects can be edited once created The formula can be changed new variables added or additional output data points added Version 3 0 To Edit a Math Object L Under the Global Objects folder select the Math Object sub folder 93 alobal Objects Select the math object in the data point list Math Objects Datapoint M ame Filter Mo Direction Mame Description ID 1 My Formula This adds temperatures 1000 Right click and select Configure Math Object from the context menu Edit the math object as described in Section 7 13 1 To finalize the edit click on Save Changes LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 149 LOYTEC 8 The LINX 101 Router The LINX 101 is equipped with a standard CEA 709 router i e an embedded L IP which connects the FT port and the CEA 852 port Depending on the use case the LINX 101 s router supports different operating modes how packets are routed between the CEA 709 side and the IP 852 side The LINX 101 also contains a configuration server CS to manage members on an IP 852 channel 8 1 CEA 709 Router
120. TEC Echelon LonMaker E 7 Please press the service pin on device lin Options Display data from service pin Total Received Filter on program ID Filter on channel 8 After the service pin has been received LonMaker commissions the replacement device creates the dynamic NVs again if any and installs the bindings 7 7 Using the LINX 10X Configurator 7 7 1 Starting as an LNS Plug In In LonMaker the plug in is started by right clicking on the LINX 10X device shape or the Gateway functional block and selecting Configure from the pop up window In NL 220 the Plug in is started by right clicking on the LINX 10X node then selecting the Option LOYTEC LINX 10X Configurator in the PlugIns sub menu In Alex the Plug in is started by right clocking on the LINX 10X device and selecting the LOYTEC LINX 10X Configurator in the Starte PlugIn sub menu A window similar to what is shown in Figure 100 should appear il LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINZ 100 Unbenannt E ni x File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web 8 x Roa Alea E OS5 t Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem Lilin Channel FT 10 Info Status Configured Online Datapoints Statistics Lweb Projects eps omo Model No o0 Set Auto e Datapoint Configuration Datapoint M ame Filter J Imported 0 7 CEA709 CSV File 0 Items 71 CEA709 LNS Scan 1 CEA709 Network Scan CEA O9 Temp
121. The MD5 secret can be entered over the Web interface You may enter the 16 bytes as one string or with spaces between each byte E g 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC DD EE FF It is recommended however to enter the secret on the console UI as the Web connection 1s not secure See Section 4 9 10 for entering the MDS secret on the console UI 5 2 8 CEA 852 Channel List Version 3 0 This page is only available on the LINX 101 If the configuration server is enabled on the LINX 101 the CEA 852 device list can be seen in the CEA 852 channel list menu An example is given in Figure 57 The Add Device button is used to add another CEA 852 device to the IP 852 channel The Reload button updates the Web page and the Recontact button contacts all devices to update their status The Execute button executes the option selected in the adjacent drop down box on the checked members Each member can be checked for that action in an individual check box in the Sel column Actions available are disable enable delete assign to NAT and remove from NAT For more information on the actions on NAT routers refer to Section 8 4 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 69 LOYTEC J L IP Config Channel List Microsoft Internet Explorer g z0x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras yl r A Q arik z o M ix al A J Suchen Se Favoriten O LCS Pu M L4 33 Adresse E http 192 168 1 253 config eia8SZchlist
122. V File Version 3 0 The CSV file format for a trend log and the location of those files are defined in this section The trend log CSV files are accessible either via their UID only or in combination with contents of the trend log object name The files are located in tmp uid trend UID csv data trend Datapointname UID csv The UID is the unique ID of the data point The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list as shown in Figure 128 For a more user friendly listing of the files the Datapointname contains the trend log s object name It is truncated after 23 ASCII characters to fit the requirements of the file system A trend CSV file for the trend object trendQ and the UID 107C would result in the CSV file data trend trend0_107C csv The UID remains constant for the life time of the object even when the name is changed The CSV file format for a trend log is defined in this section The CSV file starts with a header containing at least the first line which specifies the CSV format log csv ver The current version is 2 The next line contains the field log device It has trailing fields that specify the vendor product code firmware version and device ID string The Device ID String can be one of the following IP 192 168 24 100 BACnet Device 224100 CEA 709 NID NID LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 177 LOYTEC The log info line specifies the fields UID and name of the t
123. VT Lemp Enz In Mv Enz cantroller 1nve alux volizlux SMYT lux tnz DJ Pi n Qut Mv Enz cantroller 1nvi 3lux viglu SMYT lux tnz E en In Mv Enz controaller 1nvo 4lev percent mva 4lev percent SMVT lev percent tnz ma Qut Mv Enz contraller 1nvi blev percent vi0Sley percent SMVT lev percent tnz l Qut Mv Enz controller 1nvi 7Eemp F nvilztemp F SNMVT temp f tnz El 0 n H or 1 y o In Mv En2 controller 1nvoe amp swibch nvoOeswitch SMVT_switch tnz E fl E Mail Configuration 0 Items Figure 10 Example result of scanned NVs from LNS channel The data points now appear in the LINX 10X device folder as shown in Figure 11 The data point name will be the name of the OPC tag Now click on the Download Configuration speed button as indicated by the red rectangle in Figure 11 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 23 LOYTEC E LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt BE xl File view Model Firmware Settings Eammection Tools L Weh 8 xl jBDBcGBp uyudstktgse it Connected Device linx100 best3 Subsystem 1 JIinx Channel FT 10 Status Configured Online Datapoints Statistics es mo Model No o0 set Auto I Datapoint Configuration Local datapoints Datapoint Name Filter 2 1 Imported lf CEA709 CSV File 0 Items Mo OPC Direction adi H za Datapoint Mame Local NV Remote
124. Version 3 0 Every logical IP 852 channel requires one configuration server that manages all CEA 852 devices LINX 101 L IP LOYTEC NIC852 i LON 1000 i LON 600 LonMaker etc on this channel A simple example is shown in Figure 130 A configuration server keeps a list of all devices on a logical IP 852 channel and distributes the routing information between those devices If a device wants to join an IP 852 channel it needs to register itself at the configuration server Traditionally a dedicated Windows PC is used to act as the configuration server The LINX 101 contains an embedded configuration server and can therefore replace the PC The configuration server can be enabled in the LINX 101 in the CEA 852 server configuration menu in Section 4 3 7 This configuration server can manage one IP 852 channel and up to 256 devices on this P 852 channel In order to setup the configuration server one must specify the following parameters e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 6 e NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 6 e MDS secret if authentication is required see Section 4 7 e Enable the configuration server see Section 4 9 1 server LED lights up green e A list of CN IP channel members see Section 4 9 11 If the LINX 101 is used as a configuration server it needs a fixed IP address LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 153 LOYTEC IP 852 Channel
125. Z Figure 145 Channel Monitor Object l y nvolvalCrcErr SNVT_lev_cont Percentage of packets with CRC error received on the associated channel during the last interval nvolvalMissed SNVT_lev_cont Percentage of packets from the associated channel which could not be processed during the last interval nvolvalPkts SNVT_count_32 Number of packets received or transmitted via the associated channel during the last interval nvoTotalCrcErr SNVT count 32 Total number of packets with CRC error received via the associated channel since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoTotalMissed SNVT count 32 Total number of packets from the associated channel which could not be processed since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoTotalPkts SNVT count 32 Total number of packets received or transmitted via the associated channel since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 183 LOYTEC e nvoMaxBandUtl SNVT lev cont Maximum value of nvolvalBandUtl since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset For a smooth operation of the CEA 709 segment the bandwidth utilization must remain below 50 e nvoMaxCrcErr SNVT lev cont Maximum value of nvolvalCrcErr since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset e nvoMaxMissed SNVT lev cont Maximum value of nvolval
126. a disk file for being able to replace an LINX 10X in the network LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 102 LOYTEC START Add LINX 10X Section 7 5 Start the Configurator as a plug in Section 7 7 1 Scan network variables Section 7 7 4 l Select NVs and use on LINX 10X Section 7 7 7 Download configuration to LINX 101 Section 7 7 12 DONE Figure 86 Basic design flow with LNS To add more NVs when all bindings are in place and the LINX 10X is being used simply repeat the steps described above The Configurator software will back up the bindings create or delete the dynamic NVs and re create the bindings again 7 4 3 Configure without LNS Version 3 0 The flow diagram in Figure 87 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to configure the LINX 10X without LNS 3 x In this scenario the LINX 10X will use external NVs and polling The advantage of this solution is that no bindings in the non LNS tool or self binding nodes need to be changed This comes at the cost of a constant network load caused by polling Start the Configurator in stand alone mode and connect to the LINX 10X via the FTP method see Section 7 7 2 If changing an existing configuration upload the current configuration from the LINX 10X see Section 7 7 3 In the Configurator import data points from a CSV import file see Section 7 7 5 Select the data points that
127. a point This data point must be of type binary If the value of that enable data point is TRUE the trigger conditions are evaluated If the value of the enable is FALSE no E Mails are be triggered To Create an E Mail Trigger 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the E Mail Configuration sub folder B Global Objects fl E Mail Configuration 0 Items 2 Right click and select Configure E Mail Template from the context menu 3 Change to the Mail Triggers tab Note Of course you can also change directly to the Mail Triggers tab when creating an E Mail template 4 Click the Add button A data point selection dialog opens 5 Select one or more data point and click Ok 6 The triggers appear now in the Mail Triggers list The data points that server as E Mail triggers also appear with the E Mail icon va in the data point list E Mail Triggers Datapoint Type Condition Critical Alarm Server 7 Inthe Manage Trigger Conditions you can refine the trigger condition depending on the trigger data point class 8 If the trigger condition is depending on the value of an enabling data point you can add an enable data point by clicking on the button Select datapoint to enable disable E Mail template currently enabled 9 To remove such a trigger enable click the Remove Enable Trigger button 7 8 3 Attachments E Mail templates can be configured to have file attachments Basically any file of the dev
128. ach column Selecting a line will display a number of associated properties in the property view below Multiple items can be selected by using the lt Ctrl gt key and clicking with the mouse All items can be selected by pressing lt Ctrl A gt 7 7 5 Importing Network Variables Without LNS the tool cannot connect to an LNS database where it scans for network variables NVs Therefore the list of NVs to be used on LINX 10X has to be available in a CSV file This file can be produced by external software or created by hand The CSV format for importing NVs is defined in 10 2 1 To Import NVs from a File 1 Click on the Datapoints tab EE Niet eet Ear SUDORE Cramer Looe et JOSE Ae dado N Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem 1 linx Channel FT 10 Statistics L wWeb Projects Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 115 LOYTEC 2 Select the folder CEA709 CSV File Datapoint Configuration EHE cdi e E eee oe uM o L2 CEA O9 Network Scan E CEA709 Templates 3 Right click and select Import File In the following file selector dialog choose the CSV import file and click Ok hc LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINZ 100 Unbenannt E l nm x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web 8 x D Ed Ead NB B El p pt Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem Lilin Channel FT 10 Info Status Configured Online Datapoints Statistics
129. active bit0 invalid value output invalid value gt NV nodelCtrlnvol 6state 8000000000000000 input inactive bit0 1 input NV nodelCtrlnvilb5bfire test invalid value output invalid value NV nodelCtrlnvol4fire test 2 input NV nodelCtrlnvil3amp invalid value output invalid value NV nodelCtrlnvolzamps 773 200000 input Figure 49 Example data point listing 4 12 2 Option 2 Get Value This option allows retrieving the value of a specific data point When selecting this option the user is prompted to enter the complete data point name e g NV nodelCtrlnvil3amp Then hit Enter 4 12 3 Option 3 Set Value This option allows setting the value of a specific data point When selecting this option the user is prompted to enter the complete data point name e g NV nodelCtrlnvil3amp Then hit Enter and enter the desired value when prompted and press Enter again Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 55 LOYTEC 5 Web Interface The LINX 10X comes with a built in Web server and a Web interface to configure the LINX 10X and extract statistics information The Web interface allows configuring the IP settings CEA 852 and CEA 709 settings This interface is very simple to use and has an intuitive self explanatory user interface 5 1 Device Information and Account Management Version 3 0 In a Web browser enter the default IP address 192 168 1 254 of the L
130. address it re registers with the configuration server using this new address This feature requires an LOYTEC configuration server e g LINX 101 L IP and Roaming Members enabled on that CS A consequence of this monitoring process is that the LINX 101 contacts the CS every 45 seconds to probe for the NAT address This causes a small amount of additional traffic on the Internet link The Auto NAT feature also causes any shut down connection to be re established The NAT monitoring functions as a keep alive for the connection If neither the additional traffic nor the automatic initiation of a new connection is tolerable then the Auto NAT feature must be disabled and the NAT address configured manually In this case the Internet service provider needs to assign a fixed public IP address to the NAT router LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 163 LOYTEC 9 OPC Server 9 1 XML DA OPC Server 9 1 1 Access Methods Note Version 3 0 The primary function of the LINX 10X is to expose data points to the built in OPC server The OPC tag namespace is built from the data point hierarchy which has been configured by the Configurator software The OPC server on the device implements the data access standard via the Web service interface XML DA The OPC XML DA Web service is accessible via the URI http 192 168 24 100 DA where the IP address has to be replaced with the actual IP address of the LINX 10X The Web service is a
131. allows resetting the device into its factory default state The menu appears as shown in Figure 38 Reset Configuration Menu 1 Reset everything to factory defaults 3 Reset all passwords 4 Clear data point configuration dg QUIE Please choose Figure 38 Reset to Factory Defaults Menu 4 10 1 Option 1 Reset everything to factory defaults Select this menu item to reset the complete device to factory defaults including error log configuration files passwords etc 4 10 2 Option 3 Reset all passwords Select this menu item to reset all passwords Web interface FTP server etc to factory defaults 4 10 3 Option 4 Clear data point configuration Note Version 3 0 Select this option to clear all configured data points such as CEA 709 network variables or user registers This effectively clears the entire port configuration The LINX 10X must be rebooted to let the changes take effect This option does not reset the configuration of the built in router of the LINX 101 The nodes connected by the router are still reachable after clearing the data point configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 49 LOYTEC 4 11 Device Statistics Menu This menu holds relevant information regarding the device statistics of the LINX 10X The device statistics menu is shown in Figure 39 Use this menu only for debugging purposes There is no need to access this menu if the network is running
132. ame Domainname DNS Servers MAC Address NTP Servers Link Speed amp Duplex O Ow 1o0 01 50 N EE Quit without saving Exit and save x m Please choose 00 0A B0 01 04A 4C unset Auto Detect 40 LOYTEC disabled 192 168 24 99 lt 255 2554092 0 1924 169 Ll 1 test linx101 unset 10 101 17 2 factory default out of sync Figure 29 IP Configuration Menu when DHCP is disabled The IP configuration menu when DHCP is enabled is shown in Figure 30 IP Configuration Menu ee DHCP IP Address IP Netmask IP Gateway 5 Hostname Domainname DNS Servers 9 MAC Address 0 NTP Servers b Link Speed amp Duplex q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose gt 00 0A B0 01 0A 4C lt unset gt Auto Detect enabled 192 5 1609 24 99 Wow Dou do dz i92 169Ll l test linx101 unset l9 1T01 117 2 factory default out of sync 4 6 1 Option 1 Figure 30 IP Configuration Menu when DHCP is enabled DHCP This option switches between manual entry of the IP address netmask and gateway address or automatic configuration from a DHCP server If DHCP is disabled one must enter the configuration data described in the following sections If DHCP is enabled please skip menu items 2 through 7 Press 1 to toggle between DHCP enabled and DHCP disabled 4 6 2 Option 2 IP Address 3 IP Netmask 4 IP Gateway
133. an E Mail Template E Mail templates are used to assemble and transmit E Mails when certain trigger conditions occur The E Mail template contains the destination E Mail address the subject and text Variable parameters can be added to the text by using data point sources The transmission of an E Mail 1s triggered by one or more trigger data points For setting up E Mails the E Mail account information has to be configured on the device e g on the Web UI see Section 5 2 13 To Create an E Mail Template 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the E Mail Configuration sub folder E Global Objects Pe p E Mail Configuration 0 Items 2 Right click and select New E Mail Template from the context menu 3 Inthe Configure E Mail Template dialog which is shown in Figure 119 enter the To address and the Subject Optionally Cc and Bcc addresses can be specified Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 128 LOYTEC Configure E Mail Template x Common Mail Properties mail Triggers Attachments Template Mame Critical Alarm E Mail Daa SOIRS Add Remove To huber xhost at Datapoint Var EM Bcc Po Subject Critical Alarm Occurred Max E Mails per day 100 send burst count zd selected Data Source Value Paste to Text E Mail Text P Figure 119 Configure E Mail Template Dialog 4 Enter text in the E Mail Text multi line field 5 If the E Mail text shall contain
134. arm objects provide the alarm summary and can be used to acknowledge alarms The alarm objects are exposed to XML DA tags Each alarm is uniquely identified by an XML alarm ID XAID The XAID must identify the alarm object and the alarm ID in that object The XAID is used in the acknowledge service to identify the alarm The XAID can also be transmitted in E Mail notifications Each alarm object is represented by a folder in the OPC name space In that folder the following OPC tags shall be available e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains alarm It identifies this folder as an alarm folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the folder tag e Summary string Read only Reading from this tag the current alarm summary can be obtained The data type is string and the tag contains an XML document This tag should not be subscribed to The root element of the XML document is the alarmSummary element e NotifyCnt unsigned Read only This tag is updated with an incremented notify count for each alarm update notification This is the case for new or cleared alarm conditions and for acknowledged alarms Clients can subscribe to this tag in order to be notified about changes in the alarm summary The client has then to read the complete alarm summary when notifications occur e Ack string Write Writing to this tag acknowledges an
135. art beat feature 6 2 3 Persistency Data point values are by default not persistent This means that their value is lost after a power on reset There exist different strategies for initializing data points with an appropriate value after the device has started For input data points the value can be actively polled from the network when starting up Use the Poll on Startup feature for this behavior Polling the network values has the advantage that intermediate changes on the network are reflected For output data points the value can be restored after starting up by the application For example if the output data point s value is determined by an input data point and a math object or the output data point is in a connection with an input the input can poll its value on startup If the output data point has no specific other value source e g it is a configuration parameter set by the user it can be made persistent To make a data point persistent enable the Persistent property of the respective data point The persistency option is only available for the base data point classes analog binary multi state string and user More complex objects such as calendars schedules etc have their own data persistency rules For structured data points only all or none of the structure members can be made persistent The configuration of the top level data point which represents the entire structure serves as a master switch Setting the
136. at the LINX 10X shall expose see Section 7 7 7 For the NVs used on the LINX 10X select the static NV allocation type see Section 7 7 8 Alternatively you can create static NVs manually see Section 7 7 9 For network management tools which do not support the ECS enhanced command set network management commands the legacy network management mode must be configured see Section 7 7 14 Please contact the tool s vendor for information whether ECS is supported or not Download the configuration onto the LINX 10X see Section 7 7 12 Finally export a XIF file see Section 7 7 13 It is recommended to save the complete configuration to a disk file for being able to replace an LINX 10X in the network LOYTEC electronics GmbH 104 LOYTEC LINX 10X User s Manual START Start LINX 101 Configurator stand alone Section 7 7 2 Y Import network variables from file Section 7 7 5 y Select NVs and use on L OPC Section 7 7 7 Switch NVs to static Section 7 7 8 v Create other static NVs manually Section 7 7 9 Tool supports Enable Legacy NM Mode Section 7 7 14 Download configuration to L OPC Section 7 7 12 t Export XIF file Section 7 7 13 DONE Figure 88 Basic design flow without LNS using bindings To use the LINX 10X in the non LNS management tool commission the LINX 10X using the
137. b Reset Contact Logout networks under control a a OD ILL INN Figure 50 Device Information Page The device information page shows information about the LINX 10X and the current firmware version It includes the unique node IDs Neuron IDs of the CEA 709 network interfaces This page can also be used to send the CEA 709 service pin messages This is a useful feature when commissioning the LINX 10X since it is not necessary to be on site to press the device s status button Click through the menus on the left hand side to become familiar with the different screens If you click on Config in the left menu you will be asked to enter the administrator password in order to make changes to the settings as shown in Figure 51 Enter the default administrator password admin and select Login Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 57 LOYTEC Version 3 0 E Login Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras aurick x B FN JO suchen SP Favoriten O w m rel 33 Adresse e http 192 168 24 99 webuijconfig system Wechseln zu Links amp Snaglt E LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as operator O Device Info c Enter your username and password Confi g O Account admin E System D Password eese s O C S Un Ea O Imi Data Points E B Scheduler U Calendar Alarm c Statistics L Web
138. b Scheduled Datapoints Configure Schedule temp sched Configuration Scheduled Datapoints Detach Selected Datapoint Attach Datapoints Datapoint Description Group Default 4 Click the button Attach Datapoints This opens another data point selector window 5 Select the data points to attach and click Ok For each of the attached data points one or more lines appear in the list below the attach button If the attached point is a Structure there will be one line for each element of the structure Data points can also be attached to a scheduler by selecting a data point in the data point manager drag it onto a scheduler data point and drop it on the scheduler data point 6 Enter a Description text in the second column of each line This text will be shown when the user changes a value set on the device later on LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 133 LOYTEC Configuration Scheduled Datapoints Detach Selected Datapoint Attach Datapoints Datapoint Description Location Group Default nva current LIM8 11 0 00 Add new value presets by entering a name and pressing the Create button next to the input field New Preset Name day Create For each new preset a new column will appear in the list In this column enter the desired value for each of the attached points which will be set when this value template is scheduled The user may later edit the values for each preset on t
139. bH LINX 10X User s Manual 87 6 3 4 Trending 6 3 5 E Mail Version 3 0 LOYTEC Weekday Exception Mon Oo a aAa A Py n 126 lowest Y o 126 lowest Y o Holiday s V1 515715115 Maintenance Days Figure 78 Example of on used Exception Day The function of the exception is simple The daily schedule of a regular weekday is overridden by the daily schedule of the exception when one of the specified date patterns is in effect e g July 14 in Holidays overrides the regular weekday If more than one exception days are in use there may be conflicts on specific dates These conflicts are resolved by defining priorities for the different exceptions The daily schedule of the exception with the higher priority is eventually in effect If two exceptions with the same priority exist it is not defined which one is in effect Therefore always use distinct priorities The configuration of exceptions is done by calendar patterns in the calendar Each calendar pattern contains a number of pattern entries These entries can define the following e A single date This defines a singe date Wildcards may be used in the year to specify July 14 of every year e A date range This defines a range Starting with a start date and ending with the end date No wildcards should be used e A Week and Day definition This defines dates based on a week such as every Ist Friday in a month every Monday every last Wedne
140. bnet Broadcast Flooding This operating mode is the same as the smart switch mode from Section 8 1 2 with the only difference that subnet wide broadcasts are not flooded in this mode This operating mode can be used in large network installations where the network management tool uses group overloading to replace group addresses with subnet wide broadcasts In this operating mode the network installer must ensure that one subnet address may only exist behind one and no more than one network port This condition is met if nodes are installed using an LNS based tool on different channels that are separated either with a router shape This operating mode uses the channel routing strategy on the IP channel to distribute IP packets It uses flooding to send all packets on the IP channel to all IP devices on this IP channel The advantage of this operating mode is that it is fully plug amp play and no router configuration is required The disadvantage is that this operating mode doesn t scale very well with larger networks We do not recommend this operating mode for IP channels with more than 10 devices and packet rates of more than 500 packets s Further it is recommended to configure a multi cast group for the router in the smart switch mode to reduce the traffic burden and improve scalability Refer to Section 8 5 on how to configure the LINX 101 to use multi cast 8 2 CEA 852 Device of the Router Version 3 0 Every LINX 101 acts as a device
141. calculates a result value according to a specified formula When configuring a math object the input data points output data points and the formula must be configured by the user To Create a Math Object 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the Math Object sub folder zi Global Objects BB E Mail Configuration 0 Items j Math Object Configuration D Items 2 Right click and select New Math Object from the context menu 3 In the Create New Math Object dialog enter a name and optionally a description for the math object Create New Math Object Mame wy Formula Description This adds temperatures 4 Attach input data points by clicking the Add Input DP button Add Input DP Remove Input DP Input Datapoint Datapoint Path v nvilemp2 LIM amp 100 CEA 709 Port Datapoints v2 nviTempl LIMX 100 CEA 709 Port Datapoints 5 In the data point selector dialog select the input data points and click Ok The data points appear as v1 v2 etc 6 Select the input data point and click Add Variable to push the variable on the evaluation stack We Add value add al az Add variable 7 Select a function to be applied on the variables and click the Add Function button Jadd at a2 Add Function LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 148 LOYTEC 8 Te resulting formula is displayed at the bottom of the dialog Alternatively the formula can be entered there Output v T vg
142. cccceceeeseeseeesesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaas 44 48 RNELGConl9uration cs3 ede no ea eti ores bolas ein ede pos dedi etr aoa eran dad aru 44 43 1 Option 2 RINE port xor E EUER DIR NC Erie tva EE pa dU nete bus 44 4 8 2 Option 3 Device Name and Option 6 Location String 44 4 8 3 Option 4 MD5 authentication and Option 5 MDS secret 44 49 CEA 852 Server Configuration 4 iiio eeeeee tied Reuse opo o o evene vu Uer godes edes 44 4 9 1 Option 1 Config server status o 2s desde casvepeshencatinenacapeerandaviooaneapeodenqatiecs 45 AOD Option 2 Confie server Poller teon a E E A 45 4 9 3 Option 3 Channel Batme uei ot iei a REED R He Po Rte tubes 45 IA Fem CMe Mod re 45 4 9 5 Option 4 Primary SNTP server 5 Secondary SNTP server 45 4 9 6 Option 6 Channel Timeout cccccccccccecccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaas 45 4 9 7 Option 7 AXutodiembets SUDDOEU uoto Sta e Lib cn d Lao tad d en sait 46 4 9 8 Option 8 Roaming members support sssseeoeeeeesssssssssssssseeterresssssss 46 4 9 9 Option 9 MDS5 authentication essssssseeeeeeeeeeneeneneeee eene 46 4 9 T0 Option O MDS SECIE iem sequia oed nse Lond uie emat iba osaasavivansaantehond ites 46 AD We OP MOM a TNE GEV ICE 15 tete EIE a n oae etre e a e aee D RUE 46 29 I2 Optone Edit devit sut eeu ee dati etii te E cckeed 47 4 9 13 Option d Delete deviee canoe ei teen he e nein
143. ccessible over the same TCP port as the Web server The default TCP port is 80 The Web server port can only be changed via the console see Section 4 4 4 or in the L Config tool Since the Web service is easily routable on the Internet the LINX 10X OPC server implements the basic authentication method to protect the system from unauthorized write access Read access 1s available without authentication The basic authentication involved the operator user and the password configured for this user On how to configure the operator s password please refer to Section 5 1 To disable the basic authentication clear the operator s password It is highly recommended to use basic authentication when exposing crucial data points over the Web service To use the exposed OPC data points there exist several possibilities e Use LOYTEC s L Web visualization tool that comes free with the LINX 10X e use a standard OPC client or SCADA package or e create your own Web service client with custom Web Pages The easiest way to visualize the network s data points over a Web based interface using the LINX 10X is the L Web software This software is fully integrated into the LINX 10X Configurator and allows designing graphical page content The tool is intuitive to use like the L Vis graphical page designer The resulting L Web application is stored on the LINX 10X and can be directly accessed in your Web browser or other Internet appliances such as PDAs Fo
144. ction This is the data point direction Use input or output as directions Unit Text For analog data points this property contains a human readable text for the engineering units of the scalar value e g kilograms Analog Datapoint Max Value For analog data points this property contains the upper limit of the supported value range Note that this does not define an alarm limit Analog Datapoint Min Value For analog data points this property contains the lower limit of the supported value range Note that this does not define an alarm limit Analog Datapoint Precision For analog data points this property defines the number of decimals O specifies an integer value Display units may use this to format the floating point value accordingly Analog Datapoint Resolution For analog data points this property defines the smallest possible value increment COV Increment This property is valid for analog input data points It specifies by which amount the value needs to change before an update is generated If every write shall generate an update even when the value does not change specify O as the COV increment Active Text For binary data points this property defines a human readable text for the active state true Inactive Text For binary data points this property defines a human readable text for the inactive state false State Count For multi state data points this property defines the number of discrete Sta
145. ctronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 132 LOYTEC 3 Enter a name for the schedule and a description Note that the schedule automatically detects a calendar if it has previously been created Configuration Scheduled Datapoints Mame scheduler Description Heating Setpoint Schedule Calendar calendar 4 Click Create Schedule The new schedule appears in the data point list of the Scheduler sub folder 7 9 4 Configure Scheduled Data Points Tip Version 3 0 When a local scheduler has been created it needs to be configured which data points it shall schedule This is done by attaching data points to the scheduler Note that there may be limits how many and which data points may be attached see Section 7 9 8 This configuration must be done as an initial setup Which data points are scheduled cannot be changed at run time The daily schedules however can be changed later in the Web UI or over the network To Attach Data Points to a Scheduler 1 Select the scheduler data point in the Scheduler sub folder Ne Direction j an LO LE Scheduler Mame Object Name Obj Type 1 In temp_sched temp schedi Scheduler Object 27 Instance 2 Right click and select Configure Schedule from the context menu The same dialog which appears when a new scheduler is created is shown and allows to configure the scheduler Of course this step can also be done directly when the point is created 3 Select the ta
146. d 0 Items 7 Statistics 18 Items Remote Devices 2 Right click in the data point list and select New Datapoint in the context menu This opens the NV creation dialog as shown in Figure 108 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 119 LOYTEC Create New NV x Static External Application Device Properties Datapoint Mame miMyTem Programmatic Mame Resource File STANDARD Type temp 39 Direction Input m Functional Block Gateway 0 Mv Flags v Auth cfg Unack Repeated v Priority Cfg Authenticate Priority M Polled Sr Create Static Mi Cancel Figure 108 Create a static NV manually Enter a data point name and a programmatic name The programmatic name is the name of the static NV which is being created Select a resource file To create a SNVT let the STANDARD resource file be selected Select a SNVT and a direction If a non standard resource file has been selected choose from one of the UNVTs Choose a functional block where this static NV shall be located in Click Create Static NV The static NV is created and appears in the data point list Note that thse static interface of the LINX 10X will change as soon as static NVs are added or modified in the data point manager This change is reflected in a new model number which the LINX 10X will have after the configuration download see Section 6 4 2 Also note that the manually
147. d time lo ms Data Points Scheduler Calendar E Alarm networks under control Max age 1 ms oO Statistics Description L Web Reset Contact Logout ff ttre 7 7 Figure 63 Data point details page 5 2 10 Scheduler Version 3 0 The Web interface provides the scheduler page to edit its schedules at run time i e change the times and values that shall be scheduled Allocating new schedules and attaching data points to those schedules can only be done in the configuration software see Section 7 9 The scheduler main page displays all available schedules Click on the schedule to be edited This opens the scheduler page An example is shown in Figure 64 The effective period defines when this schedule shall be in effect Leave From and To at 5 to make this schedule always in effect Otherwise enter dates such as 30 1 2000 Schedules are defined per day On the left hand side the weekdays Monday through Sunday can be selected or exception days from the calendar e g Holidays Once a day is selected the times and values can be defined in the daily planner on the right hand side In the example shown in Figure 64 on Monday the value day is scheduled at 8 00am The same principle applies to exception days Exception days override the settings of the normal weekday Put a check mark on those exception days from the calendar which shall be used in the schedule For mor
148. d to run either on the CEA 852 interface IP 852 mode or on the FT 10 interface FT mode In the FT mode the device provides a remote network interface RNI which can be used together with the LOYTEC NIC software The RNI can be utilized for remote access and configuration as well as trouble shooting with the remote LPA Please consult our product literature for the LPA IP to learn more about this IP protocol analyzer LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 16 LOYTEC 1 3 Scope This document covers LINX 10X devices with firmware version 3 0 and the LINX 10X Configurator version 3 0 See Section 15 for differences between the different LINX 10X firmware versions Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 17 LOYTEC 2 Quick Start Guide This Chapter shows step by step instructions on how to configure the LINX 10X for a simple OPC server application 2 1 Hardware Installation Connect power 12 35 VDC or 12 24 VAC the CEA 709 network and the Ethernet cable as shown in Figure 3 More detailed instructions are shown in Chapter 3 Important Do not connect terminal 17 with Earth ground Terminal 16 may be connected to Earth ground Power Supply Ethernet Figure 3 Basic Hardware Installation 2 2 Configuration of the LINX 10X The LINX 10X can be configured via a console interface or via the Web interface To configure the LINX 10X the following steps have to be performed Version 3 0 LOYT
149. dar No Enable Remote AST Objects Calendar patterns Enable amp larm Serve Total date entries 0 v Enable Alarm Server Calendar Configuration Number of calendar patterns 5 imax 100 Total number of date entries 100 max Local schedulers 0 Daily schedules 0 Timejvalue entries O Value templates O Total value size Datapoint maps oO bytes Scheduler Configuration Remote AST Objects Mo Auko Set Set Defaults Number of local schedulers 10 max 100 Number of daily schedules ie imax 107 Entries in TimeValue table 128 max 1000 Number of value templates a max 255 Data size per value template 8 max 32 Max number of data point maps 16 max Figure 85 CEA 709 AST Project Settings As can be seen from the above list it is not easy to configure a LONMARK scheduler object There are many technical parameters which need to be set and which require some knowledge of how these scheduler objects work internally Therefore the configuration software provides the following mechanisms to help in choosing the right settings Resources required by the current project The absolute minimum settings required by the current project are shown in a table at the left side of the window This data may be used to fill in the values at the right side but some additional resources should be planned to allow for configuration changes which need more resources A
150. dcasts if the destination subnet address doesn t exist on the local channel Subnet learning should be enabled if group overloading is used in the case that more than 256 group addresses are needed Subnet learning is not plug amp play Please use NL 200 LonMaker or other network management tools to ensure that one subnet address is only used behind one LINX 10X device This can be achieved by using our LINX 10X LonMaker shapes or by placing phantom routers in e g NL 220 Please contact LOYTEC support if you think you need this feature Entry 3 allows enabling or disabling learning of group addresses Entry 4 should be left at the default Please contact LOYTEC support if you think you might need to block zero length domain Entry 5 The LINX 10X in Smart Switch Mode will learn up to four domains If your network contains more than four domains please contact LO Y TEC support for advice 4 6 IP Configuration Menu Version 3 0 The IP configuration menu holds relevant IP settings Here are some general guidelines for setting IP addresses port numbers and time values e Enter 0 0 0 0 to clear an IP address e Enter 0 to select the default port number e Enter 0 to disable a time setting e Press Return to keep the current setting The IP configuration menu when DHCP is disabled is shown in Figure 29 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual IP Configuration Menu DHCP IP Address IP Netmask IP Gateway Hostn
151. dd new entry Existing entries can be selected and edited in the box on the right hand side In the example in Figure 66 the date 14 7 is selected which means The 14 7 of every year Other entry types such as Date Range and Week and Day can be selected See Section 6 3 3 for more information about defining exception dates 5 2 12 Alarm The Web interface provides the alarm page to view the currently pending alarms of its alarm data points The alarm main page displays all available alarm data points Alarm objects which have active alarms are displayed in red Click on the alarm object to be viewed This opens the alarm summary page An example is shown in Figure 66 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 74 LOYTEC E Alarm Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ae a m F L 4 Q urik ix B A JO Suchen Se Favoriten Ol L3 Cx wj L4 rel Pr Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webui config alarm_obj handle 0x10e95ef0 amp src_hndl 0x10e972708src_dev O amp scr_id O amp tv_sec 12185738518tv_us Y Wechseln zu Links amp Snagit i DLOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin Reload Alarm Log Summary Device Info C Alarm Object Name alarms Config O UW Summary E System i Number q Active not acknowledge 1 O Active acknowledged 1 c Inactive not acknowledged 1 5 Others L Data Points Details
152. dged service 1 defines that the NV is using the polled attribute 1 defines that the NV is a synchronous NV This field is a numeric reference to a device description If it is the first occurrence of this reference in the file the columns defined below must be filled in Otherwise they can be left out The program ID string of the network device The NID of the network device The subnet address of the network device Use 0 if the device has no subnet address information The node address of the network device Use 0 if the device has no node address information The location string of the network device Use 0 if no information is available The device name of the network device Leave this field blank if this information is not available Self documentation string of the device special characters are escaped NV length in bytes NV self documentation string special characters are escaped Define how this NV shall be allocated external 1 default static 2 file 3 Table 11 CSV Columns of the NV Import File The LINX 10X provides a node object conforming to the LONMARK guidelines A diagram of the node object is depicted in Figure 144 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 180 LOYTEC Node Object nviRequest nvoStatus nviFileReq nvoFileStat nviFilePos nvoAlarm nvoAlarm 2 Figure 144 Node Object e The Node Object accepts the followin
153. e IP 852 Devices behind a NAT Extended NAT Mode When using more than one IP 852 device behind a single NAT router the recommended method in the LINX 101 configuration server is to use the extended NAT mode This mode requires that all devices support this feature Currently these are LINX 101 L IP 3 0 i LON 600 and the NIC852 PC software from LOYTEC If there are other devices in the channel this method does not work Incompatible devices are disabled from the channel in this case Please refer to the classic method in Section 8 4 3 to setup this network When using multiple devices behind a NAT router each device needs a separate port forwarding rule in the NAT router This implies that each device must use a unique client port e g 1628 1630 1631 etc The port forwarding rules must be setup that each port points to one of the IP 852 devices In the LINX 101 change the client port in the CEA 852 device configuration menu Figure 133 shows an example configuration for three LINX 101s behind the NAT router 135 23 2 1 It is recommended that both ports 1628 and 1629 are forwarded to the same private address It is then also possible to turn on the configuration server behind a NAT router In this case activate the CS on the LINX 101 which has port forwarding to 1628 and 1629 In the example in Figure 133 the LINX 101 with private address 192 168 1 100 also acts as a configuration server If the CS is activated on an LINX 101 behind a NAT
154. e MDS5 secret if authentication is required see Section 4 7 e Configuration server IP address and port number see Section 4 7 1 If the Auto member feature is enabled in the configuration server the IP 852 device can add itself to the IP 852 channel without explicitly adding the device at the configuration server Note that enabling auto member is a potential security hole since all devices can add themselves to the IP 852 channel LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 154 LOYTEC 8 3 4 Using the Built In Configuration Server For security purposes the configuration server contacts each IP 852 device on the IP 852 channel Therefore one must enter a list of all channel members in the CEA 852 Configuration Server menu see Section 4 9 This ensures that no unwanted device can join the IP 852 channel A properly configured IP 852 channel list can look like Figure 131 List of channel members NO Name IP Address Status Flags 000 local 28 168 1 253 1628 registered NAT Router 128 168 1 250 001 lip n1 TO uS S2 1529 registered 002 lip n2 L0 0 2 911621 registered 003 pos 28 168 1 37 1628 not responding Press lt RETURN gt to continue Figure 131 Properly configured IP 852 channel with 4 channel members Note that also i LON 1000 600 VNI and LOYTEC NIC852 based network nodes e g LonMaker or NL 220 applications can join the IP 852 channel managed by the configuration server Note that the built in con
155. e Section 4 3 8 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 20 LOYTEC 3 5 1 Resetting Forwarding Tables Important Important In order to reset the forwarding tables of the LINX 10X s router the status button needs to be pressed for at least 20 seconds during normal operation of the LINX 10X Resetting forwarding tables means e Resetting the CEA 709 transceiver to the standard values e Setting all ports to unconfigured e Clearing the group forwarding the subnet node forwarding and the router domain table when used in smart switch mode e Clearing the LINX 10X status and statistic data e But does not clear the IP address the CEA 852 configuration settings and the data point configuration All this is done when the button is released Afterwards a reset is performed to let the changes take effect If the LINX 10X is moved from one location to another or if major changes to the configuration of the network are made it is recommended to reset the LINX 10X configuration to factory defaults Wait at least 30 seconds after power up of the LINX 10X before pressing the Status Button to ensure that the LINX 10X has booted properly 3 6 DIP Switch Settings The LINX 10X has seven switches to select the mode of operation The DIP switch assignment for the LINX 10X is shown in Table 2 DIP Switch Factory Default Reserved LINX 101 OFF Reserved LINX 101 OFF Table 2 DIP Switch Settings for LINX 10X 3 Po
156. e data point is TRUE the trend object logs data as defined by the trend mode If the value of the enable is FALSE trending is disabled If no enable data point 1s configured the trend log is always enabled To Attach Data Points for Trending 1 Select the trend object in the Trend sub folder Ne breton endis ue 5 1 Dyt TestTrend 1014 2 Right click and select Configure Trend from the context menu The same dialog which appears when a new trend object is created 1s shown and allows configuring the trend object Of course this step can also be done directly when the object is created LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 143 LOYTEC Tip 3 Add data points to be trended Click on Add which opens a data point selector window Logged Datapoints Add Remove Datapoint CON delta nvoHumid 0 0 4 Select the data points and click Ok For each of the attached data points one or more lines appear in the list below the add button The trended data points will also appear with the trend icon in the data point manager Data points can also be attached to a trend by selecting a data point in the data point manager drag it onto a trend object and drop it on the trend object 5 Data points can be removed from the trend by clicking Remove 6 If COV mode was selected the COV increment is displayed in the COV delta column This value can be increased to produce less trend data Note that
157. e highest available Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 135 LOYTEC Important priority is marked highest Note that the actual priority values depend on the technology see Section 7 9 8 Choose different priorities for different exceptions If two exceptions are valid for a given day and their priorities are equal it is not determined which exception is in effect 7 9 6 Configure Exception Days Version 3 0 When a local calendar is used its calendar patterns need to be configured with exception days pattern entries The calendar patterns can be configured in the LINX 10X configuration software or be modified at run time over the Web UI or over the network When configuring in the software the current exception days should be uploaded from the device to work on the current configuration To Configure a Calendar Pattern l Click on the Upload calendar scheduler configuration button File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web De REY a alojo r in the tool bar of the main connections window Click Ok when the upload is finished Select the Calendar sub folder and select the calendar pattern which shall be configured No Direction Calendar Mame Index Func Block Use m E 1 In 1 calendar 1030 1 1 Holidays 1032 Right click and select Configure Pattern in the context menu The Configure Pattern dialog appears as shown in Figure 121 Add dates to the cale
158. e information on how to set up schedules and calendars refer to Section 7 9 To define actual values for the names such as day click on the tab Scheduled Data Points as shown in Figure 65 Which data points are scheduled is determined by the configuration software On this page only the actual values can be changed To define a new value click on the button Add Preset This adds a new column Enter a new preset name e g day Then enter values for the data points in the preset column The data point name column displays the short hand name defined in the configuration software LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 72 LOYTEC Scheduler Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Qa O 9g GD s vemm O Z 22784 3 Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webui config sched cFa handle 0x10e9067c amp t EJ Wechseln zu Links amp Snagit E LOYTEC Logged in as admin Schedule Configuration Scheduled Data Points Reload Name scheduler_1 Description Effective Period From T T0 55 T E Mail Data Points Scheduler Calendar Weekday Copy to Copy C Fa Alarm Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday oe BERE L Web Saturday 0399 04 Statistics networks under control Sunday Reset ST NE fee 7 0007000000 k eS SS EE Logout calendar 08 Pattern Name I Holiday NN CLR CR HE _ 7 BEES I LT mea 1
159. e refer to 1 9 2 1 Create a new L Web Project The LINX 10X Configurator provides the data point configuration which is downloaded into the device On top of that configuration an L Web design can be created for visualization To Create an L Web Project 1 Start the Configurator software and change to the L Web Projects tab File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web OSE 89S a a p vir Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem 1 linx Channel FT 10 Datapoints Statistics L Web Projects 2 The L Web project tab appears as in Figure 140 fa LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt i E B x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools Help 8 x Dae E gs osi B Et rlt Connected Device Mot Connected Inta Status Umwn Datapoints Statistics Leb Projects Projects Design Graphics Remove Gopy Ta Load From Disk Save To Disk Remove From Device Remove From Project Device Upload to Project Download to Device L Web Project Mame In Project On Device Project Size Project RAM Size Debeck Projects on Device DLOYTEG cefiguaterready 0000000 SS Figure 140 L Web Projects Tab 3 Click on Add New 4 Enter anew Project Name Create New L Web Project x Project Mame Mew Project Create and Design Graphics Create Cancel 5 Click on Create The new project appears i
160. ed 1628 default Standard o a o a xi mma zZ Figure 60 Configuration server settings Enter NTP timer server address and ports in the fields Primary SNTP and Secondary SNTP The LINX 101 will synchronize to NTP time if primary or primary and secondary NTP servers are specified For possible NTP servers please refer to Table 6 More SNTP servers can be found at http www eecis udel edu mills ntp clock1 html Service Area Austria Europe 130 149 17 21 Netherlands Europe 193 67 79 202 No norum meserie 0 ntp1 gbg netnod se 192 36 133 130 Singapore Asia jamtepat singnet com sg 165 21 110 7 United Kingdom Western Europe BARRnet Alternet west CIX west clock isc org 192 5 5 250 Table 6 NTP timer server locations The channel timeout is an IP 852 channel property and indicates how old a packet can be before it is discarded The channel timeout is set in ms To disable the channel timeout LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 68 LOYTEC enter a value of 0 To select the proper value please consult Section 8 7 1 Setting a channel timeout other than O requires a valid SNTP server entry on the configuration server The Auto members option allows members to be automatically added to the channel If turned on CEA 852 devices can register on the IP 852 channel without the device being explicitly added on the configuration server This special feature
161. ed can access the LINX 10X Using MD 5 authentication is highly recommended when using a LINX 10X remotely over the Internet Observe that the MD5 secret is never shown in the console menu for security reasons 4 9 CEA 852 Server Configuration Version 3 0 This menu holds relevant information regarding the configuration of the CEA 852 server If the built in configuration server is used to manage the devices on the IP 852 channel all CEA 852 devices on the IP 852 channel must be entered in the device list of the server The CEA 852 devices themselves then only need to have a unique IP address device name and if operated behind a NAT router the NAT address assigned The configuration server will contact all devices in the device list and update the relevant information in the client devices The server configuration menu is shown in Figure 34 The device name can also be set by the configuration server LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 45 LOYTEC CEA 852 Server Configuration Menu 1 Config server status enabled 2 Config server port 1629 default 3 NAT address lt unset gt 4 Channel name default Channel members tou Channel mode Standard 5 SNTP Servers lt unset gt 6 Channel timeout gt Off 7 Auto members support Off 8 Roaming members support on 9 MD5 authentication off 0 MD5 secret not displayed a Add device e Edit device d Delete device n Enable Disable d
162. ed lo _ lt In huffare ucad n Figure 72 CEA 709 Statistics Page m Internet Vy The System Log page prints all messages stored in the system log of the LINX 10X An example is shown in Figure 73 This log data is important for trouble shooting It contains log entries for reboots and abnormal operating conditions When contacting LOYTEC support have a copy of this log ready E Sytem Log Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei aurick M E ix 5 DO suchen 5 Favoriten e wi L4 rel 33 Bearbeiten DLOYTEC 101 Logg operator Ansicht in as Favoriten Extras 2008 07 31 11 24 26 232 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V1 9 31 Bu i amp 2008 07 31 11 24 37 699 NOTE Application Boot process finished Device Info 2008 07 31 11 31 24 462 NOTE Application Shutdown C 2008 07 31 11 31 25 573 JNOTE 3pplication Reset Config O 2008 07 31 11 31 25 5768 NOTE OSSI 0O0000002 OSSI Log terminating UJ 2008 07 31 11 31 48 255 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V1 9 31 Bu Statistics 2008 07 31 11 31 59 648 NOTE Application Boot process finished D 2008 07 31 11 45 30 432 NOTE Application Shutdoun OH 2008 07 31 11 45 32 865 NOTE Application Reset m IP C 2008 07 31 11 45 32 908 NOTE OSSI 00000002 OSSI Log terminating System Log gt 2008 07 31 11 45 55 257 NOTE Aapplication Log initia
163. efault is 200 E Mail per day This results in an average interval of one E Mail per 7 minutes e Send burst count This setting defines how many E Mails may be transmitted shortly after each other not limited by the above average interval After the burst count the average Mails per day limit takes effect The default is a maximum of 20 E Mails in a row 7 9 Local Schedule and Calendar 7 9 1 Create a Calendar As the first step the required data points must be created A calendar must be created if the schedules shall work with exception days such as Holidays If it suffices for schedules to define daily schedules for normal weekdays only no calendar needs to be created To Create a Calendar 1 Under the port folder select the Calendar sub folder to create a calendar El CEA 09 Port 2 Right click in the data point list view and select New local Calendar 3 In the Create New Calendar dialog box as shown in Figure 120 enter Name and Description of the calendar Correct the effective period if necessary Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 131 LOYTEC Create New Calendar X Calendar Properties Mame calendar Description Schedule Praductian Effective Period Date DEMM Y Start Create Calendar Cancel Figure 120 Create New Calendar dialog box 4 Click Ok The calendar appears now in the data point list view 7 9 2 Create Calendar Pattern When a
164. el Overload input binary FALSE normal Overload Ratio input analog 0 000000 normal Logout zl E http 192 168 24 99 webui config lgtw dp Folder20x10897f14 nm ma am r Internet Figure 13 Verify the data point configuration on the Web interface Note that the auto generation has created dynamic NVs as counterparts to the scanned NVs on the CEA 709 network and also created bindings for those NVs If static NVs or external NVs with polling shall be used on the CEA 709 network or more advanced NV selection schemes shall be employed please refer to Chapter 6 to learn more about the Configurator software 2 4 Connect with an OPC XML DA Client After the configuration has been downloaded to the LINX 10X it is ready to serve OPC XML DA clients Connect to the LINX 10X using the URL http 192 168 24 99 DA given that 192 168 24 99 is the IP address of the LINX 10X Note that by default writing to OPC tags needs basic HTTP authentication using the password for the operator user This is by default operator Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 25 LOYTEC 3 Hardware Installation 3 1 Enclosure 3 1 1 LINX 10X The LINX 10X enclosure is 6 TE 1 TE 17 5 mm wide for DIN rail mounting following DIN 43 880 see Figure 14 1234567 OPC Status Ethernet CEA709 Console Power Status LED Status LEDs Connector ED Button 85 Ethernet 100Base T 4 5 6 15 16 17 11 Figure 14 LINX 10X E
165. el behind a NAT router this field should be left at the default setting 1628 If changed it must not be the same as the configuration server port 4 7 3 Option 5 Device name You can enter a device name with up to 15 characters It is recommended to use unique device names 4 7 4 Channel Mode This field reflects the current channel mode of the device It is configured by the configuration server If there are any two devices in the channel which use the same IP address but different ports e g multiple LINX 10X behind one NAT router the channel switches to Extended NAT mode Please refer to the L IP User s Manual to learn more about configuring the Extended NAT mode in the configuration server 4 7 5 SNTP server channel timeout The configuration server sets the SNTP server addresses and the channel timeout 4 7 6 Option 6 Escrow timeout Defines how long the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X waits for out of sequence CEA 852 data packets before they are discarded Please enter the time in ms or O to disable escrowing The maximum time is 255 ms Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 43 LOYTEC 4 7 7 Option 7 Aggregation Timeout Defines the time interval in which multiple CEA 709 packets are combined into a single CEA 852 data packet Please enter the time in ms or O to disable aggregation The maximum time is 255 ms Note that disabling aggregation will negatively affect the performance of the
166. em time It provides several sub items as shown in Figure 21 With menu option 1 the time source is defined The following options are available auto manual NTP LonMark In the auto mode the device switches to the first external time source that is discovered The option manual allows setting the time manually using menu items 2 and 3 In manual mode the device does not switch to an external time source Note that if NTP is selected the NTP servers have to be configured in the IP setting menu see Section 4 3 5 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 36 LOYTEC 4 4 2 Option 2 4 4 3 Option 7 4 4 4 Option 9 4 4 5 Option c Version 3 0 Date Time Configuration Menu 1 Set time sync source manual 2 Set date 2008 01 29 3 Set time 10 58 56 4 Set timezone offset 01 00 5 Set DST none q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 21 Configure Date Time Menu The timezone offset must be defined independently of the time source It is specified in menu option 4 and defines the offset to GMT in hours and minutes e g Vienna Austria is 01 00 New York U S A is 06 00 Start and end of daylight savings time DST is defined in menu option 5 Pre defined choices are offered for Europe and U S A Canada DST can be switched off completely or set manually for other regions Configure
167. er Please specify one or better two SNTP servers if CEA 852 devices are communicating over the Internet rather than an Intranet A list of available timeservers can be found at www ntp org A subset of this list is shown in Table 6 on page 67 More SNTP servers can be found at http www eecis udel edu mills ntp clock1 html 4 9 6 Option 6 Channel Timeout This menu item allows setting the channel timeout The channel timeout is an IP 852 channel property and indicates how old a packet can be before it is discarded The channel timeout is set in ms To disable the channel timeout enter a value of 0 To select the Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 46 LOYTEC proper value please consult Section 8 7 Setting a channel timeout other than 0 requires a valid SNTP server entry on the configuration server see Section 4 9 5 4 9 7 Option 7 Auto members support 4 9 8 Option 8 4 9 9 Option 9 This menu item allows members to be automatically added to the channel If turned on CEA 852 devices can register on the IP 852 channel without the device being explicitly added on the configuration server This special feature is useful in combination with the LPA IP since it can add itself to the configuration server during the debug session Non responding auto members are automatically removed from the channel This feature 1s turned off by default and must be explicitly turned on Use this option with care because new
168. er of entities Objects that monitor values of data points and generate alarms depending on an alarm condition are called alarm sources The alarms are reported to an alarm server on the same device The alarm server maintains a list of alarm records called the alarm summary The alarm server is the interface to access the local alarms This can be done over the network or the Web UI An alarm record contains the information about the alarm This includes information about the alarm time the source of the alarm an alarm text an alarm value an alarm type an alarm priority and an alarm state An alarm record undergoes a number of state changes during its life cycle When the alarm appears it is active When the alarm condition subsides the alarm becomes inactive Active alarms can be acknowledged by an operator Then they become active acknowledged Active alarms can also become inactive but an acknowledgement is still required Then they become ack pending When an alarm is inactive and was acknowledged it disappears from the alarm summary Other devices can access the alarm information of an alarm server These devices are alarm clients They register with the alarm server and get notified about changes to the alarm summary Alarm clients can be used to display the current alarm summary and acknowledge alarms Depending on the underlying technology some restrictions to the available alarm information and acknowledgement behavior may exist
169. ers since the two are always used together e Enable Scheduler Objects This checkbox enables local LONMARK compliant scheduler objects on the device Checking this box will automatically enable the calendar as well e Enable Remote AST Objects This checkbox enables the functional object for NVs which are used to access remote AST objects If this box is checked the Clients functional block is included in the static interface e Number of calendar patterns Specifies the maximum number of different exception schedules day classes like holiday maintenance day supported by this calendar object e Total number of date entries Specifies the maximum number of date definitions which may be stored by the calendar This is the sum of all date definitions from all calendar entries A date definition is for example a single date a date range or a week and day pattern every last Friday in April e Number of local schedulers This is the number of local scheduler objects which should be available on the device Each local scheduler data point created in the data point manager will connect to one of these scheduler objects There may be more scheduler objects available on the device than are actually used at a certain time It is a good idea to have some spare scheduler objects ready in case another scheduler is needed Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 100 LOYTEC Version 3 0 Number of daily schedules This is
170. ers and IEC61131 variables on the LINX 10X Datapoints The CEA 709 port folder contains a data points sub folder This folder holds all data points which are allocated on the port To create a data point select the folder and use the context menu Calendar This folder is used to hold a locally available calendar object with its calendar patterns definitions of day classes like holiday maintenance day and so on Current devices allow one local calendar object To create a calendar select the folder and use the context menu Scheduler This folder is used for local scheduler objects Each of these objects will connect to a local scheduler on the device and will be configurable through this data object that is the data objects transfers schedule configuration data between the actual scheduler present on the device and the user interface To create a scheduler select the folder and use the context menu Trend This folder is used for local trend log objects Each of these objects will be able to trend a data point over time and store a local trend log file To create a trend log object select the folder and use the context menu Alarm This folder is used for local alarm server objects Each of these alarm server objects represent an alarm class which other objects can report alarms to Other devices can use the alarm server object to get notified about alarms To create an alarm server object select the folder and use the context menu
171. es This operating mode should also be used in networks with more than 10 LINX 101 devices on one IP channel and heavy network traffic on the IP channel more than 500 packets s since channel routing sends the IP packet only to the LINX 101 device s that connect to the CEA 709 node s addressed in this IP packet and not to all LINX 101 devices on the IP channel This is the standard operating mode 8 1 2 Smart Switch Mode Important Important Note Note Note Note Version 3 0 The LINX 101 can be configured to act as a learning switch in a CEA 709 network This operating mode is called smart switch mode In this operating mode the LINX 101 decides if the message has to be forwarded or not based on the destination address of a message Thus it isolates local network traffic e g in case of heavily loaded networks This operating mode doesn t support network loops Whenever a network is reconfigured it is recommended to clear the forwarding tables in the LINX 101 by pressing the status button for at least 20 seconds see Section 3 5 1 The router supports learning of up to 4 Domains All messages which are received on an unknown domain are forwarded to all ports The subnet node learning algorithm supports segmentation of the network traffic on a subnet node basis Thus the user does NOT need to take care of any subnets spanning multiple physical channels Even when a node is moved from one channel to another the
172. esi oec Eb ba oae L OPER OE SEINS FREE REPAS EER 89 7 The LINX IOX Confiepurator 22 2 eo cotto eter e pero to reae reae e Prose oret Eze 90 y EB Ir mE 90 T Sonwa allao sarp osos eoisotle onde te eoe epi s E veo bE e doedeiue 90 7452 Iegistration asd Plus IM uie cra oer ao ote mae tre eod lados 90 TA Operatii MIOO CS eiie atc eio etate disco ioa canines one ines fu Ra EL 92 1 2 lt Data Pome Manager osaceae oka e aa a aE aia 92 CAE CUu cdbil Ersa AA A AEE 93 Taa Daa Pont LAS eues ae bra Ete d EO AEE 94 12 5 CBEIODOUDV VOW ee a E 94 De CEA 709 PFOP TIE Sais a A 96 Too Project Setini ERR 97 Faded ASCOT AN aan T 97 Too Data Pont Namie ME Siia e ETE EE O 97 Too CBA 709 SENE Srini E E ana T E 98 Toa AST SEUIPS enea a N e 99 74 4 Workflows for the LINX IUX cese et eet oira RE 101 7 4 1 Involved Configuration Files esee 101 DAD CODD Sure Wt INS oeedoteesd sock eb stus dutep Se dt delest epi ned iu tuas EE Rode emus 101 TAS Configure without LNS 5 oes dee ete etae o saei AEE et etapa ev ev Io PUER HS 102 7 4 4 Configure without LNS Using Bindings eeeeeeeee 103 Tee Iseplace a LINX IOA oi onde oa escis ated NS 104 TS Adding LINX AIOX p pretio ua dti erede ties de te e ua talis 105 4 0 Replacea LENX IUX iiiteseiienscvieeter veces etsos bes seio Vo eqvEso V eVav a raa a EEEa 108 7 7 Using the LINX 10X Configurator
173. esion irean ue 5 1 Dyk TestTrend 1014 2 Right click and select Configure Trend from the context menu 3 Change to the Triggers tab Of course you can also change directly to the Triggers tab when creating a trend object LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 144 LOYTEC 4 Click the Add button A data point selection dialog opens 5 Select one or more data points and click Ok 6 The triggers appear now in the Trend Triggers list Add Remove Trend Triggers Datspoint state Value Update 7 Inthe Manage Trigger Conditions you can refine the trigger condition depending on the trigger data point class 8 When done with the data point setup click Save Changes to leave the dialog 7 11 4 Download Trend Data in CSV Format Trend logs can be downloaded from the device via FTP in CSV format see Section 10 1 2 The CSV contents are generated on the fly from the internal binary storage when accessing the file Each trend log point has one CSV file The files are located in data trend TrendLogName_UID csv Where TrendLogName is the data point name of the trend Trend Name The UID is the unique ID of the trend log object The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list of trend log data points as shown in Figure 128 This would result in the trend CSV file data trend out temp 107C csv No Direction Trend Mame Object Mame obj Tvpe Instance Alloc
174. estroyed If enabled or disabled out of sequence packets are never sent to the CEA 709 channel Please refer to Section 4 7 6 on how to enable or disable escrowing 8 7 4 SNTP Time Server Small IP networks like LANs have a small propagation delay for packets traveling in these networks In this case it is not necessary to specify an SNTP server In larger CN IP networks like the Internet with possibly long packet delays one must specify a SNTP server to synchronize the local clocks of the LINX 101 devices The local clocks must be synchronized to a common notion of time in order to make CN IP protocol features like escrowing Channel Timeout work properly The SNTP timeserver can be specified on the CN IP channel level in the configuration server which distributes the timeserver address to all CN IP devices on the CN IP channel A primary and a secondary SNTP server can be defined please refer to Section 4 7 5 and Section 4 9 5 on how to enable the SNTP server 8 8 Advanced Topics 8 8 1 Aggregation Aggregation or packet bunching is a technique that collects multiple CEA 709 packets into a single larger CN IP packet Aggregation improves overall system performance since one CN IP packets now carries multiple CEA 709 packets und with the same number of CN IP transactions more CEA 709 packets can be exchanged between LINX 101 devices thus reducing protocol overhead The Aggregation Timeout defines the time period in ms in which the tra
175. et provider Typically the SMTP server port can be left at 25 In the field Source E Mail Address enter the E Mail address of the LINX 10X s E Mail account In the field Source E Mail Sender Name enter a name that the E Mail will display as the source name Note that only ASCII characters are allowed in the name If replies shall be sent to another E Mail address specify this in the Reply E Mail Address If the provider s SMTP server requires authentication enter the required user name and password Note that only username password is supported SSL TLS authentication is not supported by the LINX 10X e g Hotmail gmail cannot be used To verify the E Mail configuration reboot the device to let the changes take effect and return to the E Mail configuration page Then press one of the Send Test E Mail buttons Note that a DNS server must be configured in the IP settings see Section 5 2 2 to resolve the E Mail server host name The Web UI displays a warning message at the top of the page if the DNS configuration is missing LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 75 LOYTEC 3 E Mail Configuration Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras arik X T ix 5B TN JO suchen Adresse e http 192 168 24 98 webuifconfig smtp Wechseln zu Links DLOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin amp snaglt Ej Warning Currently no DNS server configured
176. etails on how to load factory defaults by pressing the status button and Section 4 10 on how to load factory defaults through the console menu 4 3 9 Option 9 Device statistics Select this menu item to display advanced IP CEA 852 device and statistics information like number of packets sent and received number of channel members etc See Section 4 11 for details 4 3 10 Option 0 Reset Device Select this menu item to reboot the LINX 10X Some configuration changes require to reboot the device Note that this option does not reset the configuration 4 3 11 Option a Data Points This menu option takes the user to the data point menu In this menu the configured data points in the LINX 10X can be viewed and set with values See Section 4 12 for details 4 4 System Configuration Menu The system configuration menu holds various system configuration settings Typically the system configuration menu looks like shown in Figure 20 System Configuration Menu 1 Configure date time Mon Aug 11 18 38 47 2008 GMT 02 00 DST 2 Configure earth pos 48 13 14 N 16 20 05 E 200 m 7 FTP server enabled 8 FTP server port 21 default 9 Web server enabled 0 Web server port 80 default C E mail account configuration q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 20 System Configuration Menu 4 4 1 Option 1 Configure Date Time This menu item allows to configure the LINX 10X s syst
177. etwork management tool but is completely transparent in the network Use this operating mode in a plug amp play networking environment If Smart Switch Mode is enabled the system configuration menu has 3 additional entries as shown in Figure 28 The switch mode should only be used in LAN networks Note If you change the router mode of the LINX 101 s router you must reset the device with the main menu item 0 or by pressing the reset button in order to have the changes take effect Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 39 LOYTEC CEA 709 Router Switch Menu 1 Router mode Smart Switch 2 Subnet node learning subnet node 3 Group learning enabled 4 Block zero length domain disabled 5 Block unknown domains disabled Quit without saving Exit and save m m Please choose Figure 28 CEA 709 Router Switch Menu Entry 2 allows setting the mode for learning of subnet node addresses The selection can be Subnet node learning Subnet learning or Disable If subnet node learning is selected the LINX 10X s router will learn based on subnet node addresses see Section 8 1 2 Subnet broadcasts are flooded This mode is plug amp play If subnet learning is disabled all subnet wide broadcasts are forwarded by the LINX 10X s router from one side to the other side If subnet learning is enabled the LINX 10X s router will learn the subnet addresses on both network ports and will only flood subnet broa
178. eue a Sane We gaa veel EEUU RUs 47 4 9 14 Option n Enable Disable device eesseeeeeeeeeeenel 47 4 9 15 Option s Show device Statistics ccccccccccccccscsssssssessssseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 47 4 9 T6 Optton Erst chanel Me mers Jess seas ioo ate ER oett to Lodi teu a bs topRE UG 47 4 9 17 Option r Recontact devices amp list channel members 48 4 10 Reset configuration load factory defaults eeeeees 48 4 10 1 Option 1 Reset everything to factory defaults sssssssse 48 4 10 2 Option 3 Reset all passwords ccccccccccccccceecceeeaeeseeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeaaas 48 4 10 3 Option 4 Clear data point configuration essseeeeeeeeeeee 48 ALL Device Statistics MeHU code eie iE EDU Eee cea E Ebo evi EE entree aa 49 4 11 1 Option la CEA 852 device statistics eeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeee 49 4 11 2 Option Ib RNI Device Statistics 2 0 cccccssssssesseseeececeeeeseeeeeeeeeaas 50 4 11 3 Option 2 CEA 709 Application Statistics sse 51 T Lb OpBiond IP statisties dutem bea dE DER bc pu deed i css 52 4 11 5 Option 6 Enhanced Communications TesSt sceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 53 4 12 Data Point Mem ap uiii cie Depto a do aa pluvia esinen n ianea 53 4 12 b Option ListDat FON S enn uci taxa eo eene e dct 54 4 T22 SUN IMALEOC I
179. evice s Show device statistics 1 List channel members r Re contact devices amp list channel members Quit without saving Exit and save d m Please choose Figure 34 Configuration Server Menu 4 9 1 Option 1 Config server status The menu item allows enabling and disabling the built in configuration server If the configuration server is enabled the green configuration server LED labeled CS will be on otherwise it will be off 4 9 2 Option 2 Config server port The menu item allows changing the port for the configuration server It is recommended to keep the default port setting of 1629 4 9 3 Option 3 Channel name The menu item allows setting a channel name that can consist of up to 15 characters The number of channel members is shown below the channel name 4 9 4 Item Channel Mode This field reflects the current channel mode The LINX 101 configuration server automatically determines this mode depending if there are any two devices in the channel which use the same IP address but different ports e g multiple LINX 101s behind one NAT router If all IP addresses are unique the mode is Standard if some are not unique the mode is Extended NAT mode Please refer to Section 8 4 2 to learn more about the implications of this mode 4 9 5 Option 4 Primary SNTP server 5 Secondary SNTP server The two menu items allow setting the IP address of the primary and secondary SNTP time serv
180. ew LINx 100 12 08 2008 21 12 48 12 08 2008 21 13 35 12 08 2008 21 13 21 acknowledged high limit Light Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 3lux 4000 000000 admin new LINx 100 12 08 2008 21 12 56 12 08 2008 21 13 21 12 08 2008 21 12 48 acknowledged high limit Overheat Alarm NV tn2 Controller 1nvi ttemp 120 000000 admin new LINx 100 12 08 2008 21 12 45 12 08 2008 21 12 48 12 08 2008 21 12 49 MEM low limit Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 10 000000 admin new LINX 100 12 08 2008 21 12 49 12 08 2008 21 12 56 oa high limit Light Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 3lux 4000 000000 admin new LINX100 12 08 2008 21 12 56 12 08 2008 21 12 56 active high limit Light Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 3Iux 4000 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 56 12 08 2008 21 12 48 active low limit Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 10 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 48 12 08 2008 21 12 49 nae high limit Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 120 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 45 12 08 2008 21 12 49 12 08 2008 21 12 45 active high limit Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 120 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 45 xil 4 b Ferio OOOO O O O O OSS l nees Z Figure 75 Alarm Log Page 5 4 L Web This configuration page provides a download link to the L Web application installer Clicking on Install will download the installer for L Web and start the installation process See Section 9 2 for more information on working with the L Web visualization 5
181. exported XIF file and create the bindings When changing a running LINX 10X configuration with existing bindings it is recommended to create additional data points as external NVs with polling as described in Section 7 4 3 Otherwise a new XIF file needs to be exported and replacing the LINX 10X in the non LNS tool requires the user to create all bindings again from scratch see Section 6 4 2 7 4 5 Replace a LINX 10X An LINX 10X can be replaced in the network by another unit This might be necessary if a hardware defect occurs First of all the replacement LINX 10X needs to be configured with the appropriate IP settings including all relevant CEA 852 device settings The remainder of this section focuses on the LINX 10X data point configuration The work Version 3 0 flow is depicted in Figure 89 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 105 LOYTEC START Start the Configurator stand alone Section 7 7 2 Y Load a saved LINX 10X project file Y Download configuration to LINX 10X Section 7 7 12 Replace LINX 10X Section 7 6 Reboot the LINX 10X Section 5 4 DONE Figure 89 Basic work flow to configure a replacement device Start the Configurator software stand alone and connect via the FTP method see Section 7 7 2 Then load the LINX 10X Configurator project file from disk which has been saved when the original LINX 10X has been con
182. f what is scheduled at which day and which time In the Display Schedules list select a single schedule to view its scheduled values and times Use the multi select feature to get the overview of more schedules An example is shown in Figure 74 Scheduler Preview Windows Internet Explorer a Bife xl Go v http 192 168 38 2 webui statistics sched m x Live Search e we we Scheduler Preview fap gt dh sp Seite Extras DLOYTEC LINX 110 Logged in as admin x n Oo Local Time Tuesday 24 June Wednesday 25 June Device Info S ESE om N a Mos XVEXEXX EN CZ S 2345670 gl og gg gt Statistics T ponis gy ow att H O Besssza2 59589900 ge ge Ties 5 w P gg m Scheduler D MyCCCUm C whemm 00 0 00 ww x U TWTFSS og LS O 222345 6 mO EE E EN EE gt TResunmD qe 5 MARCAR DIN C ZZ ZZ DS um p szsessm age cae ontact 28 29 3031 1 2 3 a gg A yeas ee 2E OOOO BEEN 2008 pue Terese M LIN TEENER LIE MM Edda E ag 2522222 MEE EE MEE EN 252527 25283031 ages es prc a o S E FE FE EE Wie Intranet 100 gt 4 Figure 74 Scheduler Statistics Page 5 3 7 Alarm Log Page The alarm log page provides an overview of all alarm logs on the system Click on one of the links to view a specific alarm log Each alarm log contains a historical log of alarm transitions When an inactive and acknowledged alarm d
183. figuration server should be used if LINX 101 or L IP devices are communicating across firewalls NAT routers For adding multiple devices behind a NAT router the L IP configuration server supports the extended NAT mode see Section 8 4 2 The configuration server automatically switches the channel mode to extended NAT if needed Note that the i LON 600 must be configured with the i LON CS to extended NAT mode before adding the i LON 600 to the configuration server because the i LON 600 does not switch to that mode automatically 8 4 Firewall and NAT Router Configuration The LINX 101 s router can be used behind a firewall and or NAT Network Address Translation router as shown in Figure 132 Note that in general only one CEA 852 device can be used behind the NAT router This mode of operation is referred to as Standard channel mode It is fully compliant with CEA 852 LOYTEC s newer devices such as the L IP and the LINX 101 support more than one CEA 852 channel member behind a NAT router This mode of operation is referred to as Extended NAT channel mode This mode introduces extensions to the standard mode which need to be supported by all members Other devices supporting the extended NAT mode are the 7 LON 600 See Section 8 3 4 on compatibility with the i LON 600 8 4 1 Automatic NAT Configuration Version 3 0 In order to use the LINX 101 behind a firewall the public NAT address and the local IP address must be set in the IP confi
184. figured or modified Double check if the data point configuration seems sensible Then download the configuration to the LINX 10X see Section 7 7 12 If using an LNS based tool the LINX 10X device needs to be replaced in that tool see Section 7 6 If you are not using LNS then refer to your network management tool s reference manual on how to replace a device After replacing the device in the network management tool reboot the LINX 10X see Section 5 5 7 5 Adding LINX 10X Version 3 0 To configure a LINX 10X in your LonMaker drawing the device needs to be added to the LNS database and commissioned This Section refers to LonMaker TE and describes how to add a LINX 10X to your database To Add a Device to LonMaker TE 1 In your LonMaker drawing drag a device stencil into the drawing Enter an appropriate name as shown in Figure 90 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 106 LOYTEC New Device Wizard Device name in v lumber of devices ta create 1 v Commission device Device Template Create new device template Mame uiia Ox_FT 10 M Channel Auto detect channel Type rer x Mame Channel FT 10 Zur ck Finish Abbrechen Hilfe Figure 90 Create a new device in the drawing 2 Select Commission Device if the LINX 10X is already connected to the network 3 In the Device Template group box select the existing device template of the LINX
185. for imported NVs when they shall be allocated as static NVs on the LINX 10X To Change the NV Allocation Type 1 In the data point view select the NVs in the LINX 10X CEA709 port folder for which the NV allocation shall be changed Tip By using Ctrl A all NVs can be selected 2 Select the NV allocation property as indicated by the red rectangle in Figure 107 3 To make the data points static NVs on the LINX 10X select Static NV Local datapoints Datapoint Name Filter No OPC Direction af 0 aj Datapoint Name Local NY Remote NY Allocation 1 v Out N _SiFO7Od3207 Chrinvi0S_bemp nols mvi08_bemp Static NV 2 v out N _S1FFO70d3207Ctrinvi09_temp nvi0 9_temp External NV 3 v ou NV 8iff z d3207Ctrinvil lev percen nvii lev percen External NV io Qut MV 8Siff z d32 07Ctrnvill lev percen nvill lev percen External MV a Analog D atapoint fic A Unsigned Long 16 bit unsigned integer degrees Lelu Figure 107 Change the NV allocation type 7 7 9 Create Static NVs The LINX 10X can be configured to change its static interface and boot with a new one Apart from creating static NVs from scanned or imported data points static NVs can also be created manually in the LINX 10X CEA 709 folder To Create Static NVs Manually 1 Select the LINX 10X CEA 709 Port Datapoint folder Er 2 LINZ 100 iun 1 1 System Registers 8 Items bd 1 5 Scheduler 0 Items 7 Alarm 0 Items Tren
186. format of an E Mail is defined through E Mail templates An E Mail template defines the recipients the E Mail text value parameters inserted into the text and triggers which invoke the LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 88 LOYTEC transmission of an E Mail An E Mail template can also specify one or more files to be sent along as an attachment A prerequisite to sending E Mails is the configuration of an E Mail account on the LINX 10X This can be done on the Web UI see Section 5 2 13 It is recommended to use the E Mail server of your Internet provider For public mailers enable the required authentication Please note that the LINX 10X does currently not support the SS TLS E Mail authentication mechanism Therefore Hotmail and gmail cannot be used The amount of generated E Mails can be limited using a rate limit algorithm The transmission of E Mails can be disabled altogether by using a special data point That data point can be scheduled or driven over the network 6 4 CEA 709 Technology 6 4 1 CEA 709 Data Points Version 3 0 Data points in the CEA 709 network are known as network variables NVs They have a direction a name and a type known as the standard network variable type SNVT or user defined network variable type UNVT In addition to NVs also configuration properties CPs in the CEA 709 network can be accessed as data points Both standard CP types SCPTs and user defined CP types UCPTs are s
187. g use the menu LonMakerlRefresh in LonMaker or hit F5 in NL 220 7 7 13 Build XIF for Port Interface When using static NVs on the LINX 10X the LINX 10X Configurator can export a new XIF file for the changed static interface To create a XIF file do the following 1 Select the LINX 100 CEA 709 Port folder El LINx 100 System Registers 9 Items 77 User Registers 2 Items Datapoints 1 Items 4 Calendar 0 Items pp Scheduler 0 Items 2 Right click on that folder and in the context menu select Build XIF 3 This opens a file requestor where the XIF file name needs to be entered Select a useful name to identify the LINX 10X e g as linx 10X_1 xif 7 7 14 Enable Legacy NM Mode Version 3 0 For network management tools which do not support the ECS enhanced command set network management commands the legacy network management mode must be configured Please contact the tool s vendor for information whether ECS is supported or not Note that changing to legacy network management mode changes the static interface of the device To Enable Legacy NM Mode 1 Inthe LINX 10X Configurator menu go to Settings gt Project settings 2 Click on the tab CEA709 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 124 LOYTEC 3 Putacheck mark in Enable Legacy Network Management Mode Project Settings General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA 708 CE4709 AST 4 Click Ok 5 Download
188. g 1 and pressing Enter in the console window This will bring up the device information which shows the current firmware version Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 190 LOYTEC 13 Troubleshooting 13 1 Technical Support LOYTEC offers free telephone and e mail support for our LINX 10X product series If none of the above descriptions solves your specific problem please contact us at the following address LOYTEC electronics GnbH Blumengasse 35 A 1170 Vienna Austria Europe email support loytec com web http www loytec com tel 43 1 40208050 fax 43 1 402080599 or LOYTEC Americas Inc 11258 Goodnight Lane Suite 101 Dallas Texas 75229 USA Email support loytec americas com web http www loytec americas com tel 1 512 402 5319 fax 1 972 243 6886 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 191 LOYTEC 14 Application Notes 14 1 The LSD Tool Please refer to application note ANOO2E LSD Tool for further information about the LOYTEC system diagnostics tool for the LINX 10X 14 2 Use of Static Dynamic and External NVs on a Device Please refer to application note ANOO9E Changing Device Interface in LNS for more information on the static NV interface XIF files device templates and the use of static dynamic and external NVs on LOYTEC gateway products Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 192 LOYTEC 15 Firmware Version
189. g commands via nviRequest RQ NORMAL RQ UPDATE STATUS RQ REPORT MASK RQ ENABLE RQ DISABLE RQ UPDATE ALARM RQ CLEAR ALARM RQ RESET RQ CLEAR RESET e LONMARK alarming is supported via nvoAlarm SNVT alarm and nvoAlarm 2 SNVT alarm 2 This allows devices supporting the LONMARK alarm notifier profile to receive alarms generated by the LINX 10X and react with a defined action e g send an email By supporting both alarm SNVTs SNVT alarm and SNVT alarm 2 legacy and state of the art alarm handling is supported e nviDateEvent SNVT date event nvoDateResync SNVT switch These NVs are part of the standard LONMARK node object if schedulers are used If not bound the local calendar is used If a global calendar shall be used both of these NVs must be bound to the respective NVs of the global calendar object e nvilimeSet SNVT time stamp When writing to this NV the system is set The time value is interpreted as local time e nvoSystemTemp SNVT temp This NV can be used to poll the system temperature of the LINX 10X It does not send updates and must be polled e nvoSupplyVolt SNVT volt This NV can be used to poll the supply voltage of the LINX 10X It does not send updates and must be polled e nvolpAddress SNVT str asc This NV can be used to poll the IP address of the LINX 10X It does not send updates e nciEarthPos SNVT earth pos This configuration property can be used to set the earth position of the
190. gated size 2MB 100 100 10 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 195 LOYTEC 17 References 1 L Web Users Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Document No 88074201 August 2008 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 196 LOYTEC 18 Revision History 08 02 07 Initial revision V1 0 for L OPC 1 0 s C o E Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH
191. guration menu see Section 4 6 By default the NAT address is determined automatically when adding the LINX 101 to the channel in the configuration server Alternatively the NAT address can be configured manually Furthermore the NAT router must be configured to forward ports 1628 and 1629 for UDP and TCP packets to the private IP address of the LINX 101 192 168 1 100 in Figure 132 In summary we can say the following parameters must be set in order to operate an LINX 101 behind a NAT router e Specify the IP address private IP address 192 168 1 100 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 155 LOYTEC e Specify the gateway address e g 192 168 1 1 e Specify the NAT address public IP address 135 23 2 1 or use automatic NAT router discovery e Enable port forwarding for ports 1628 and 1629 in the NAT router for TCP and UDP e Enable the SNTP port 123 in the firewall if SNTP is used IP 192 168 1 100 NAT 135 23 2 1 L INX UU demeet Firewall NAT Router pa Uis IP Channel 135 23 2 1 192 168 1 1 Forward UDP and TCP ports 1628 and 1629 to IP address 192 168 1 100 00000000 Internet FT 10 Figure 132 Operating an LINX 101 behind a NAT router and firewall Note that an LINX 101 must be used as configuration server when the device is installed behind a firewall or NAT router The LINX 101 with the configuration server can also be located behind a firewall 8 4 2 Multipl
192. h mm Scheduler Se En O Get Date Time Alarm gt _ Statistics D C Earth Position L Web Latitude s 3 4 7 N Longitude E 9 20 os B E piis Altitude 200 m Contact Save Earth Position Get Earth Position Logout Webserver Webserver port a0 CSV delimiter Save Webserver Settings Get Webserver Settings FTP Server FTP enabled Vv FTP port 1 gt E P ag nterne Figure 53 System Configuration Page The next section on the page allows to configure the LINX 10X s earth position This setting defines the longitude latitude and elevation of the device on the planet The latitude and longitude are entered as degrees minutes and seconds The altitude or elevation is entered in meters from sea level This setting is used for an astronomical clock For fixed locations such as a building the position can be entered on this page For moving locations this setting can be updated over the network using the network variable nciEarthPos see Section 10 2 2 The FTP server can be enabled and disabled and the FTP server port can be configured The FTP server is used for instance to update the firmware see Section 12 1 or download a new data point configuration Further the Web server port and the delimiter for CSV files can be configured Note that the Web server can only be disabled on the console interface 5 2 2 IP Configuration Version 3 0 Figure 54 sh
193. h multi state data point an OPC tag is created The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties e Item Canonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 3 Integer e Item Value Integer The present data point value e Item Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable e Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update e Item Access Rights Integer This property defines if the tag is read only or read write e tem Description String This is the description of the data point e Item EU Type Integer This property is 2 for multi state e Enumerated EU Array of String This property contains the state texts of the data point 9 1 2 4 User Type Version 3 0 User type data points contain a byte array of user defined data Data points of user type are also exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For each such data point an OPC tag is created The item value of the user defined data is a hex string without whitespace representing the byte array e g B034 The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties e Item Canonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 8 String e Item Va
194. have appropriate tags for those objects Therefore the LINX 10X exposes AST objects as a set of OPC tags describing the object All tags for one AST object are collected under an OPC node representing the AST object 9 1 3 1 Scheduler Object The LINX 10X exposes the schedule objects to OPC XML DA tags Each schedule object is represented by a node in the OPC name space The content of the schedule XML contents referred to in this Section must be compliant to the scheduleCfg schema This schema can be found at the LOYTEC Web site The XML documents can refer to the target namespace http www loytec com xsd scheduleCfg 1 0 In that node the following OPC tags are available e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains schedule It identifies this folder as a schedule folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the folder tag e Schedule string read write This tag configures the schedule The data type is string and the format is in XML The XML document contains the scheduleCfg element as the root element e Caps string read only This tag contains the schedule capabilities The data type is string and the format is in XML The XML document contains the scheduleCapabilities element as the root element e CalltemPath string Read only const This is an optional tag If present it contains the item path to the calendar objec
195. he CEA 709 calendar adhere to the LONMARK standard objects For CEA 709 certain restrictions exist that need to be kept in mind Attached data points can only represent an entire NV but not individual elements of a structured NV CEA 709 schedulers may have several different groups of data points attached i e the value preset may consist of more than one element For example a CEA 709 scheduler might schedule a SNVT temp and a SNVT switch and have 3 elements in each value preset as depicted in Figure 122 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 137 LOYTEC Group Default Description Lacation LIMX 110 CEA7 08 Port Datapoints 0 00 21 00 16 00 0 00 0 00 50 00 LINX 110 CEA709 Port Datapoints 7 LINS 110 CEA703Port Datapoints jn 00 ooo 100 Figure 122 Example value presets in CEA 709 schedulers nva setpoinE Priorities of exception days in a CEA 709 scheduler range from O the highest to 126 the lowest The value 127 is reserved as a default for weekdays Further the implementation as LONMARK standard objects requires the use of configuration properties If the number of CEA 709 schedulers or their capacities for daily schedules and value presets is changed the resource and static interface of the CEA 709 port changes The resources reserved for LONMARK calendar and scheduler objects can be changed in the project settings see Section 7 3 4 When downloading a project the software
196. he L Switch In this configuration the LINX 101 s router doesn t need to be configured with a network management tool but is completely transparent in the network Use this operating mode in a plug amp play networking environment The switch mode should only be used in LAN networks In Smart Switch mode this page has two more configuration fields Subnet node learning and Group learning The field Subnet node learning allows setting the mode for learning of subnet node addresses The selection can be subnet node subnet or disabled If subnet node learning is selected the LINX 10X s router will learn based on subnet node addresses see Section 8 1 2 Subnet broadcasts are flooded This mode is plug amp play If subnet learning is disabled all subnet wide broadcasts are forwarded by the LINX 10X s router from one side to the other side If subnet learning is enabled the LINX 10X s router will learn the subnet addresses on both network ports and will only flood subnet broadcasts if the destination subnet address doesn t exist on the local channel Subnet learning should be enabled if group overloading is used in the case that more than 256 group addresses are needed Subnet learning is not plug amp play Please use NL 200 LonMaker or other network management tools to ensure that one subnet address is only used behind one LINX 10X device This can be achieved by using our LINX 10X LonMaker shapes or by placing phantom routers in e g
197. he LINX 10X Configurator automatically selects a usable value which can be overridden in the field Model Number marked by the blue rectangle in Figure 113 Click Start to start the download Each of the actions is displayed in the Task List section of the dialog The current progress is indicated by the progress bar below When the download process has finished a notification window appears which has to be acknowledged by clicking Ok LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 123 LOYTEC Configuration Download CEA 7098 Port Target Device Information Mame LIMx 11 Download the configuration Save dynamic NVvs Channel Channel 1 Save bindings Subnet zc Remove dynamic Nis Commission device Node 7 Reboot device Upgrade device Program ID S000D7s404840402 Restore dynamic Ns Restore bindings Node ID BOO0000S9C yc Create dynamic Nvs Commission device Reboot device Create bindings IP Address 192 1868 38 2 Firmware 1 0 0 Model Number l Generate Free LNS Options uon create bindings Controls Task Progress Abort Clase C1 Figure 113 Configuration Download Dialog Register on device template Update device info Note that after the download is complete the interface changes become active on the LINX 10X i e the static NV interface has changed Refresh the network management tool to synchronize the tool with the changes to the LNS database made by the LINX 10X Configurator e
198. he device but cannot add new value presets unless there is only one line one value in the list Datapoint Description Default dsy right o 00 16 00 If there are multiple output values which belong together they can be grouped in order to save space on the device For each group the entered value is stored only once even if there are more data points in the same group Default ooo 21 00 16 00 LINK 110 CEA709Port Datapoints 1 mooo 21 00 16 00 Description 10 When done with the point and value setup switch back to the Configuration tab or click Save Changes to leave the dialog 7 9 5 Configure Daily Schedules Version 3 0 Once a scheduler is configured with attached data points and value presets the daily schedules can be defined This can be done on the device or over the network at run time or also in the configuration software A daily schedule defines the time and value sequences in a 24 hour period starting at 00 00 and ending at 23 59 hours For each weekday its own daily schedule can be configured In addition daily schedules can be configured for exception days from a calendar such as Holidays An exception day always overrides a normal weekday If more than one exception day is used a priority must be assigned This is necessary so that the system knows which schedule to follow on a day which is part of more than one calendar pattern To Configure a Daily Schedule Open the
199. ice can be specified as an attachment To Configure Attachments 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the E Mail Configuration sub folder E Global Objects PU H E Mail Configuration 0 Items 2 Right click and select Configure E Mail Template from the context menu 3 Change to the Attachments tab Note Of course you can also change directly to the Attachments tab when creating an E Mail template Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 130 LOYTEC 4 Select an available file from the Attach File drop down box Attach File system log Add 5 Click the Add button The file appears in the Attachments list Attachment Device File Path system log Mar flog system log 6 To remove an attachment select the attachment file in the Attachments list and click the button Remove 7 8 4 Limit E Mail Send Rate The transmission of E Mails is triggered by the configured trigger conditions It is not predictable how often the trigger condition will cause the transmission of an E Mail The E Mail template can be configured to limit the number of transmitted E Mails This is done in the Configure E Mail Template dialog To configure an E Mail Rate Limit configure the settings e Max E Mails per day This setting defines how many E Mail can be sent on average per day The actual number of transmitted E Mails on a specific day may be slightly higher than this setting depending on burst rates The d
200. if there are any two devices in the channel which use the same IP address but different ports e g multiple L IPs behind one NAT router If all IP addresses are unique the mode is Standard if some are not unique the mode is Extended NAT mode Please refer to Section 8 4 2 to learn more about the implications of this mode LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual Version 3 0 67 CEA 852 Server Microsoft Internet Explorer LOYTEC Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras arik M M x B A pe Suchen Se Favoriten e2 d jw L4 rel 3 Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webuilconfig eia amp S2serv EJ wechseln zu Links Snagit Ej DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Device Info Config m Data Points Scheduler Calendar Alarm Statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout Fertig networks under control Config server status Config server port NAT address Channel name Channel members Channel made Pri SNTP server leave empty to disable Sec SNTP server leave empty to disable Channel timeout ms leave empty to disable Auto members Roaming members MDS authentication Warning This internet connection is insecure All data will be transmitted in clear text Use the console interface to change the MD5 secret in a secure way MDS secret 16 bytes hex Save Settings Get Settings enabl
201. if you do not want to provide access to the LINX 10X configuration via the Web interface Press 9 to toggle between enabled and disabled Press 0 to change the Web server port To use the default port enter 0 when asked for the port number E Mail Account Configuration This menu item allows configuring the LINX 10X s E Mail account for your E Mail provider The content and time when E Mails are sent is configured elsewhere The E Mail configuration menu is shown in Figure 23 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 37 LOYTEC Enter 1 to specify the outgoing e mail server This is the SMTP server of your provider Typically the SMTP server port is 25 If not enter 2 and specify another port Enter 3 to set your source e mail address and 4 to enter the name displayed for this source e mail address Optionally enter 5 to specify a reply to address if replies shall not be sent to the specified source e mail address If the provider s SMTP server requires authentication enter the required user name and password in menu item 6 Note that only username password is supported SSL TLS authentication is not supported by the LINX 10X e g Hotmail gmail cannot be used E Mail Account Configuration Menu 1 Outgoing e mail server SMTP lt unset gt 2 Outgoing e mail server port 25 default 3 Source e mail address lt unset gt 4 Source e mail sender name lt unset gt
202. ight click and select New Alarm Log from the context menu Common Properties Name System Alarm Log Description Logs all system alarms 0 Log Size ioo items 782 25 kB In the Create New Alarm Log dialog enter a Name for the alarm log Optionally enter a Description LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 141 LOYTEC 4 Entera Log Size which defines how many transitions are resident in the alarm log 5 Click on the button Add on top of the Logged Alarm Objects list Logged Alarm Objects Add Remove Datapoint 6 A data point selector dialog opens Select one or more alarm objects that shall be logged and click Ok The alarm objects appear in the list 7 Click Create to create the alarm log object 7 10 5 Limitations for CEA 709 Alarm Servers Local CEA 709 alarming supports only one alarm server object This alarm server object is represented by the device s LONMARK node object and facilitates the SNVT_alarm2 output network variable Acknowledging alarms in the alarm server is adhering to the LONMARK specification and relies on the RQO CLEAR ALARM mechanism 7 11 Local Trending 7 11 1 Create a Local Trend Version 3 0 The value of a data point can be logged over time This is referred to as trend data To generate trend data a trend object has to be created The trend data is stored in a data logger file This file can be downloaded via FTP in binary or CSV format see Section 10 1 2
203. igurations Further it is recommended to configure a multi cast group for routers in the smart switch mode to reduce the traffic burden and improve scalability Refer to Section 8 5 on how to configure the LINX 101 to use multi cast 8 1 3 Store and Forward Repeater The router can be configured to operate in a repeater mode where all messages are forwarded regardless of the address format To put the router into repeater mode the following steps need to be performed 1 DIP switch number 1 must be on see Table 2 2 DIP switch number 2 must be off see Table 2 3 The forwarding tables must be reset by pressing the status button for at least 20 seconds see Section 3 5 1 This operating mode uses the channel routing strategy on the IP channel to distribute IP packets It uses flooding to send all packets on the IP channel to all IP devices on this IP channel The advantage of this operating mode is that it is fully plug amp play and no router configuration is required The disadvantage 1s that this operating mode doesn t scale very well with larger networks We do not recommend this operating mode for IP channels with more than 10 router devices and packet rates of more than 500 packets s Further it is recommended to configure a multi cast group for router in repeater mode to reduce the traffic burden and improve scalability Refer to Section 8 5 on how to configure the LINX 101 to use multi cast 8 1 4 Smart Switch Mode with No Su
204. igured in the Web UI see Section 5 2 1 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual i Bo we NV name is output E flag auth cfg flag auth flag priority cfg flag priority flag servicetype cfg flag service ack flag polled sai oOo ol flag sync Deviceref programID neuronID Subnet Node location str Devicename node self doc NV length NV self doc Allocation 10 2 2 Node Object Example W 9 m nvoTemp m m O O 9000A 44850060402 80000000C8C8 N W DDC amp 3 2 0 2 014 179 LOYTEC Description A numeric value of the SNVT as defined in the SNVT master list The example value 39 represents a SNVT temp The NV index in decimal of the NV on the network node Indices start at O The NV selector in decimal of the NV on the network node The NV programmatic name of the NV on the network node Defines if this NV is an output on the network node 1 means the NV is an output on the network node 1 defines that authentication can be configured for this NV on the network node 1 defines that the NV is authenticated 1 defines that the priority can be configured for this NV on the network node T defines that the NV is using priority 1 defines that the service type can be configured for this NV on the network node 1 defines that the NV is using acknowle
205. indow The FTP connect dialog as shown in Figure 101 opens FTP Connect to Device 7 X Target Device Recent Connections LIN 110 Save Delete Hostname ar IP Address 192 158 38 2 User admin Password ibd caen Figure 101 FTP connection dialog 2 Enter the IP address of the LINX 10X the user and password The default user is admin and the default password is admin 3 Optionally click into the Recent Connections field and enter a user defined name for this connection That name can be selected later to connect Click on Save to store that connection 4 Click on Connect This established the connection to the device 7 7 3 Uploading the Configuration Version 3 0 To get the current network variable configuration of the LINX 10X the port interface needs to be uploaded This will upload the entire configuration from the LINX 10X including data points dynamic NVs and schedules To Upload a Configuration 1 Click on the upload button File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web Os H E27 elala o in the tool bar The configuration upload dialog opens up as shown in Figure 102 2 Click on the button Start to start the transfer This will upload the configuration of all ports if the software is connected stand alone via FTP or the network variable interface for which the LNS plug in was started for If the LINX 10X is on line also LOYTEC electronics GmbH L
206. ing This internet connection is insecure All data will be transmitted in clear text Use the Statistics console interface to change the MDS secret in a secure way L Web MDS secret 16 bytes hex Location string unknown Reset NAT Address 7 Automatic NAT leave empty to disable Contact Multicast Address 225 0 0 39 leave empty to disable Logout Save Settings Get Settings n E TF FB M nene Vy Figure 59 CEA 852 Device Configuration Page 5 2 7 CEA 852 Server Configuration Version 3 0 This page is only available on the LINX 101 On this configuration page the configuration server on the LINX 101 can be enabled or disabled In the drop down box Config server status select enabled and click on Save Settings to activate the configuration server Then the configuration server settings page appears as shown in Figure 60 If the configuration server is enabled the green configuration server LED labeled server will be on otherwise it will be off The configuration server port can be changed in the Config server port field It is recommended to keep the default port setting of 1629 The field Channel name is informational only and can consist of up to 15 characters The field Channel members displays the current number of members on the IP 852 channel The field Channel mode reflects the current channel mode The LINX 101 configuration server automatically determines this mode depending
207. ing Modes The Configurator can be used in on line off line and stand alone mode On line and off line mode refers to the 2 operating modes of your configuration tool e On line Mode This is the preferred method to use the configuration utility The network management tool is attached to the network and all network changes are directly propagated into the network This mode must be used to add the device commission the device extract the port interface definition and to download the configuration into the device e Off line Mode In off line mode the network management tool is not attached to the network or the device is not attached to the network respectively This mode can be used to add the device using the device templates create the port interface definition and to make the internal connections e Stand alone Mode The Configurator can also be executed as a stand alone program This mode is useful for the engineer who doesn t want to start the configuration software as a plug in from within a network management tool e g NL 220 LonMaker or Alex Instead the engineer can work directly with the device when online or engineer it offline 7 2 Data Point Manager The Configurator uses a central concept to manage data points The data point manager as shown in Figure 81 is used to select create edit and delete data points The dialog is divided into three sections e The folder list number 1 in Figure 81 e The data point l
208. ints that are attached to an AST function See Table 8 for details kon Data Point Usage Data point is scheduled Data point has an active alarm condition Data point has an inactive alarm condition Data point is a trigger for E Mails Data point used for trending Table 8 Icons for used data points in the data point list view 7 2 3 Property View Version 3 0 When one or multiple data points are selected the available properties are displayed in the property view Properties which are read only are marked with a lock sign When applying multi select only those properties common to all selected data points are displayed Depending on the network technology and data point class different properties may exist Data point properties common to all technologies e Datapoint Name This is the technology independent data point name This name may be used for the native communication object i e network variable but can be different e g longer Data point names must be unique within a given folder The maximum length is limited to 64 ASCII characters LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 95 LOYTEC Version 3 0 Datapoint Path This informational property specifies the entire path of the data point within the data point hierarchy The maximum length is limited to 64 ASCII characters Datapoint Description This is a human readable description of the data point There are no special restrictions for a descriptio
209. is 255 This NV is polled only nvoElapsedTime SNVT elapsed tm Time since LINX 10X powered up or since the statistics for this port where reset The statistics can be reset with the network variable nviClearStat in the node object see Section 10 2 2 or if the node is reset with a network management command e g while the device is commissioned If the monitored port is not available in a system configuration the value is set to the invalid value The NV is polled only nvoAvgPkts SNVT count 32 The average number of packets per second received or transmitted via the associated channel since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvolvalBandUtl SNVT lev cont Bandwidth utilization of associated channel during the last interval For a smooth operation of the CEA 709 segment the bandwidth utilization must remain below 50 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 182 LOYTEC Version 3 0 Channel Monitor Object b nvoPort 2 nvoElapsedTime p nvoA vg Packets gt nvolvalBandUtil nvolvalCrcError gt nvolvalMissPkt gt nvolvalPackets l nvoTotalCrcError gt nvoTotalMissPkt gt nvoTotalPackets nvoMaxBand Util 2 nvoMaxCrcError nvoMaxMissPkt nvoMaxPackets nvolvalMissPrea l gt nvoTotalMissPrea Nu nvoMaxMissPrea gt nvoOverload gt nvoOverload Ratio Z
210. is useful in combination with the LPA IP since it can add itself to the configuration server during the debug session Non responding auto members are automatically removed from the channel This feature is turned off by default and must be explicitly turned on Use this option with care because new CEA 852 devices can add themselves to the channel without knowledge of the system operator This could cause a potential security hole The Roaming members option allows tracking CEA 852 devices when their IP address changes This feature must be turned on if DHCP is used and the DHCP server can assign different IP addresses to the same device same Neuron ID In combination with Auto NAT the LINX 101 s router can also be operated behind NAT routers which change their IP address between connection setups For more information on this topic refer to Section 8 4 1 The roaming member feature is turned on by default It is recommended to turn off this feature if DHCP is not used or if the DHCP server always assigns the same IP address to a given MAC address Use the drop down box MD5 authentication to enable and disabe MD5 authentication If MDS authentication is enabled all devices on the IP 852 channel must have MD5 enabled and must use the same MDS secret Note that MD5 authentication cannot be used together with the LON 1000 since the LON 1000 is not fully compliant with the CEA 852 authentication method MD5 can be used with the i LON 600
211. isappears from the alarm summary page live list the alarm log contains this last transition and maintains this over a reboot An example is shown in Figure 75 To refresh the alarm log contents click on the Reload button Currently active alarms cannot be acknowledged in this historical view Follow the link to the attached alarm objects to get to the respective live lists where alarms can be acknowledged on the Web interface see Section 5 2 12 The alarm log contents can be uploaded from the device in a CSV formatted file Click on the button Upload Alarm Log to upload the current log To clear the log press the button Clear Alarm Log Please note that this permanently purges all historical alarm log data of this alarm log Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 81 LOYTEC Z Alarm Log Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Q arik T x ix B T pO suchen Se Favoriten Se wil L4 rel 8 Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webui statistics alarm_log_objthandle 0x10e e8dc page 0 M Wechseln zu Links amp Snagit ET Reload Upload Alarm Log Clear Alarm Log Alarm log name Alarm Log Attached alarm objects alarms Event Time State Type Priority Description SourceName 2 Value Ack Source Alarm Time Clear Time 12 08 2008 21 13 35 acknowledged low limit Overheat Alarm NV tn2 Controller 1nvi 1temp 10 000000 admin n
212. ist number 2 in Figure 81 e Anda property view number 3 in Figure 81 d se Auto C Datapoint Configuration ocal datapoints Datapoint Mame Filter B Imported 1 J 3 CEA709 CSV File 0 Items A G Datapoint Mame Local NY Remote NV 3 CEA709 LNS Scan IJ CEA709 Network Scan 3 CEA709 Templates Ej LINX 100 1 5 System Registers 9 Items J User Registers 0 Items B P CEA709 Port Datapoints 8 Items 3 Calendar 0 Items J Scheduler 0 Items 15 Alarm 0 Items O Trend 0 Items 3 Statistics 18 Items Datapoint Name NV In2 Controller 1nvo temp J Remote Devices Datapoint Path LINX 100 CEATOS Port Datapoints NV tm20Controller 1nivo Dtemp BB Global Objects 8 E Mail Configuration 0 Items Datapoint Description fe Math Object Configuration 0 Items Gl Dat apoint Status Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Itemdi BS GA Use Pollcycle value as ED Pall on Startup 123 Pollepele s 22 Max Cache Age ms o1 Persistent N _tn20Controller_invoOOtemp rivittbemp nvolibemp NV tnz Controller 1nvid itemp nvo ibemp NV tnz Controller 1nvo zlux riviQelux NV tnz Controller 1rvi 3lux meatu NV knz Controller 1nvo 4lev percent malev percent NV tnz Contraller 1nvi Slev percent nvo0Sley_percent NV tn2 Controller 1nvo temp f nvi amp temp f NV tn20Controller 1nvi 7temp F nvo 7temp F X lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ao cJ C Om B amp B CO D Be
213. it cannot be lowered under the trended data point s own COV increment Go to the data point configuration to change the COV increment in this case 7 In addition a special Trend Enable data point can be selected If configured the trend log will only log data if the value of this data point evaluates true 1 e is not zero Click the button to select a data point T Enable Disable Datapoint g 8 To remove the enable data point click the Remove button 9 When done with the data point setup click Save Changes to leave the dialog 7 11 3 Trend Triggers Note Version 3 0 Local trend objects in CEA 709 can be operated in trigger mode In this mode one ore more trigger data points cause the generation of a snapshot containing the values of the trended data points at the time instant the trigger is activated For a trend object one or more trigger conditions can be defined Depending of the trigger data point type the trigger conditions can be refined Note that the behavior of the trigger data point 1s influenced by the COV properties of the data point If the Only notify on COV property is checked the data point triggers only if its value changes to the value of the trigger condition If that property is not checked the data point triggers on every write with a value that matches the trigger condition To Configure Trigger Data Points for Trending 1 Select the trend object in the Trend sub folder Te pr
214. knowledge and dedicated troubleshooting tools The CEA 709 OPC Server LINX 100 LINX 101 is equipped with an FT port CEA 709 and a 100 BaseT Ethernet port CEA 852 and exposes CEA 709 network variables NVs and configuration properties CPs to the OPC world The configuration software can be run as an LNS plug in or stand alone The OPC server node is connected to the FT port The LINX 101 also contains a router between the FT and the IP 852 channel which can be configured like an L IP It also includes a configuration server CS to manage the IP 852 channel The LINX 100 contains a remote network interface RNI instead of the router for remote network access The device is fully compliant with ANSI CEA 709 ANSI CEA 852 A ENV14908 and OPC XML DA 1 01 The OPC server s NVs can be bound in the CEA 709 network or operated as external NVs External NVs are polled or explicitly written to without allocating static or dynamic NVs on the LINX 10X In this case address information is supplied by the configuration software by importing e g a CSV file User defined network variable types UNVTs can be used as dynamic or external NVs Configuration properties CPs on other devices can be accessed through file transfer To transfer CPs the device supports both the LonMark file transfer and the read memory access method For CPs the standard SCPTs and user defined UCPTs are supported All of those new CEA 709 data points can be exposed as
215. known Avg aggregation from IP unknown UDP Packets sent s 9 TCP Packets sent 0 Multi cast Packets sent 0 Show extended RNI device statistics y n y Figure 42 RNI Device Statistics A sample console output of the extended RNI device statistics is shown in Figure 43 At the end the user is prompted 1f the statistics shall be cleared Press lt y gt to reset all counters to 0 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 5 4 11 3 Option 2 CEA 709 Application Statistics A sample console output is shown in Figure 44 Version 3 0 Extended RNI Device Statistics Session ID SNTP synchronized Number of CR member infos Current Message Dropped Dropped Dropped Dropped Dropped channel routing mode alloc count failed authentication invalid frame out of sequence duplicates missing timestamp Active DC datetime Active CM datetime Active SL datetime 4 Stale DC messages Stale CM messages Stale SL messages Stale CR messages Number of DC updates Number of CM updates Number of SL updates Number of CR updates CR packets sent to CS Clear RNI device 1 statistics CEA 709 y n LOYTEC Ox7c5 71b6 no 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0 Co C C Co CO Oo CO CO Figure 43 Extended RNI Device Statistics application statistics Device CEA 709 Node state Transmission errors 0 Transmit TX failures 0 Receive TX full 0 Lost messages 0 Missed mes
216. lates Elf LINX 100 7 System Registers 9 Items J User Registers D Items Ef CEA709 Port of Datapoints 0 Items 0 Calendar 0 Items 7 Scheduler 0 Items Alarm 0 Items 71 Trend 0 Items 77 Statistics 18 Items m J Remote Devices 9 Global Objects fl E Mail Configuration 0 Items j e 9i math Object Configuration D Items hee IT Alarm Log Object Configuration D Items DLOYTEC oriawr OSS Figure 100 LINX 10X Configurator main window 7 7 2 Starting Stand Alone The LINX 10X can also be used without LNS based tools In this case the LINX 10X Configurator needs to be started as a stand alone application Go to the Windows Start Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 112 LOYTEC menu select Programs LOYTEC LINX 10X Configurator and then click on Configure LINX 10X This starts the LINX 10X Configurator and the main connections screen is displayed If the LINX 10X is not yet connected to the network go to the Firmware menu and select the firmware version of the LINX 10X to be configured If the LINX 10X is already connected to the network it is recommended to connect the configuration software to the LINX 10X To Connect to an LINX 10X Stand Alone 1 Select the FTP connection method by clicking on the FTP connect button File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web PAE iESEI vot in the tool bar of the main connections w
217. lectronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 34 LOYTEC Device Information Product LINX 101 Product code LINX 101 Firmware LINX 10x Primary Image Version 3S0 20 Build date Fri Aug 8 13 54 31 2008 Serial number 008701 80000001C686 Free memory 5830K 477K CPU load 0 6 System temp Adis EES Supply volt La eov CEA 709 router unique node IDs CEA TOSZIP 80 00 00 01 C6 86 80 00 00 01 C6 88 Online CEA 709 application unique node IDs CEA 709 80 00 00 01 C6 87 Online Press lt RETURN gt to continue Figure 19 Device Information 4 3 2 Option 2 Serial firmware upgrade This menu item allows updating the LINX 10X firmware via the serial interface console See Section 12 2 for detailed instructions Note If you select this option accidentally you can return to the main menu by sending a break signal In case your terminal program does not offer an option to send a break signal the device must be reset to return to the main menu 4 3 3 Option 3 System configuration Select this menu item to change system configuration settings See Section 4 4 for details 4 3 4 Option 4 CEA 709 configuration Select this menu item to change the CEA 709 configuration settings See Section 4 5 for details 4 3 5 Option 5 IP configuration Select this menu item to change the IP configuration settings like IP address default gateway DHCP and MAC address See Section 4 6 for details 4 3 6 Op
218. lient port represents the IP port of the LINX 10X s CEA 852 device This setting should be left at its default 1628 unless there are more than one CEA 852 device operated behind a single NAT router Please refer to the L IP User s Manual to learn more about NAT configuration In the field Device name the user can enter a descriptive name for the LINX 10X which will appear in the IP channel to identify this device You can enter a device name with up to 15 characters It is recommended to use unique device names throughout the IP channel The Channel mode field reflects the current channel mode of the CEA 852 device It is configured by the configuration server If there are any two devices in the channel which use the same IP address but different ports e g multiple LINX 10X behind one NAT router the channel switches to Extended NAT mode Please refer to the L IP User s Manual to learn more about configuring the Extended NAT mode in the configuration server The configuration server sets the SNTP server addresses and the channel timeout The filed Escrow timeout defines how long the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X waits for out of sequence CEA 852 data packets before they are discarded Please enter the time in ms or O to disable escrowing The maximum time is 255 ms LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 65 LOYTEC Version 3 0 The field Aggregation timeout defines the time interval in which multiple CEA 709
219. lized LINX 101 V1 9 31 Bu nec 2008 07 31 11 46 06 639 NOTE Application Boot process finished 2 2008 07 31 14 56 51 170 NOTE 43pplication Shutdown 2008 07 31 14 56 54 088 NOTE 43pplication Reset O 2008 07 31 14 56 54 093 NOTE OSSI 00000002 OSSI Log terminating Alarm Log 2008 07 31 14 57 15 257 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V1 9 31 Bu 2008 07 31 14 57 26 626 NOTE Application Boot process finished L Web Q 2008 07 31 15 41 18 869 NOTE Application Shutdown C 2008 07 31 15 41 19 459 NOTE 43pplication Reset R t 2008 07 31 15 41 19 465 JNOTE OSSI OOOO0000Z2 OSSI Log terminating ese 2008 07 31 15 41 41 649 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V1 9 31 Bu 2008 07 31 15 41 52 867 NOTE Application Boot process finished Contact 2008 07 31 15 44 34 902 NOTE Application Shutdown 2008 07 31 15 44 36 027 NOTE Application Reset L t 2008 07 31 15 44 36 032 NOTE OSSI 00000002 OSSI Log terminating ogou 2008 07 31 15 44 57 253 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V1 9 31 Bu 2008 07 31 15 45 10 2008 07 31 15 55 56 nmmno m 21 580 NOTE Application Boot process finished O87 NOTE Application Shutdown COCIMATTIL awn laantraawnt i Naant ft ret titre Version 3 0 Figure 73 System Log Page LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 80 LOYTEC 5 3 6 Scheduler Statistics Page The scheduler statistics page provides an overview o
220. ll as the configuration server The test thoroughly diagnoses the paths between individual members of the IP channel and the configuration server in each direction Port forwarding problems are recognized For older devices or devices by other manufacturers which do not support the enhanced test features the test passes as soon as a device is reachable but adds a comment that the return path could not be tested A typical output is shown in Figure 71 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 78 LOYTEC CEA 852 Enh Comm Test Windows Internet Explorer http 192 168 38 2 webuijstatistics cnip cc enhcomtest refreshed refreshed m 4 X Live Search WE dM CEA 852 Enh Comm Test FPE cse GExras LOYTEC LINX 110 Logged in as admin O Restart Enh Com Test Enhanced Communication Test finished Device Info r C Config O CEA 852 Device Address Result Round Trip Comment JJ 192 168 38 99 1629 CS I 3 ms OK j j a Statistics QD 192 168 38 99 1628 p 3ms OK O cC OK FAILED testing communication ad Un E oO Enhanced Communication Test Summary lt v OK 2 Device s jet U OK return path not tested 0 Device s FAILED 0 Device s Contact Logout 4 gt Fertig amp JLokles Intranet 100 7 Figure 71 Enhanced Communication Test Output The round trip value RTT is measured as the time a packet sent to the peer device needs to be
221. lor indicates the CEA 852 IP channel status as described above Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 28 LOYTEC 3 4 8 CS RNI LED On the LINX 101 this LED indicates the status of the CEA 852 configuration server If illuminated green the configuration server is enabled On the LINX 100 this LED indicates the remote network interface RNI status The LED is dark if RNI is not supported by this device or the interface is not enabled The LED is green if the RNI is currently in use 3 4 9 Wink Action If the LINX 10X receives a wink command on any of its network ports it shows a blink pattern on the CNIP and the CEA 709 activity LEDs The CEA 709 activity and the CNIP LED turn green orange red each 0 15 s This pattern is repeated six times After that the CNIP LED flashes orange six times if the wink command was received on the IP channel or the CEA 709 activity LED flashes orange six times if the wink command was received on the CEA 709 channel After that the LINX 10X LEDs resume their normal behavior 3 4 10 Network Diagnostics The LINX 10X provides simple network diagnostics via its CEA 709 activity LED If the LED does not light up at all this port is not connected to any network segment or the connected network segment currently shows no traffic If the LED is flashing green the network segment connected to this port is ok If the LED is flashing red a potential problem exists on the network segme
222. lti cast address here Please contact your system administrator on how to obtain a valid multi cast address Refer to the L IP User s Manual to learn when it is beneficial to use multi cast addresses in your channel 4 8 RNI Configuration This menu item allows setting up the remote network interface configuration of the LINX 10X The RNI sub menu is shown here RNI Configuration Menu 2 RNI port 1628 default 3 Device name 4 MD5 authentication SOLE 5 MD5 secret not displayed 6 Location string unknown q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 33 RNI Configuration Menu 4 8 1 Option 2 RNI port This is the port for PC to LINX 10X communication If the LINX 10X resides behind a NAT router UDP and TCP port forwarding to the NIC IP must be enabled in the NAT router for the specified port default 1628 If several LINX 10Xs are located behind the NAT router each LINX 10X must be configured with a different port and all ports must be forwarded accordingly in the NAT router To switch back to the default port simply enter 0 or 1628 4 8 2 Option 3 Device Name and Option 6 Location String These settings specify the name and location of LINX 10X device These strings can be used to identify the LINX 10X in the L Config tool 4 8 3 Option 4 MD5 authentication and Option 5 MD5 secret If MD5 authentication is enabled only PCs that have the correct MD5 secret configur
223. lue String A hex string without whitespace representing the byte array e Item Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable e Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update e Item Access Rights Integer This property defines if the tag is read only or read write e tem Description String This is the description of the data point LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 167 LOYTEC 9 1 2 5 Structured Data Points Structured data points are modeled as one user type data point which contains the entire structure value as a byte array The respective structure fields are created as sub data points of appropriate class For example a SNVT switch in CEA 709 would be modeled as one user type data point of 2 bytes length and two sub data points one an analog value member and one a multi state state member The relation between user type data point and sub data points is also exposed to OPC In this case an OPC node is created for the user type data point In that node the sub data points are exposed as OPC tags The entire structure is also exposed as a user type OPC tag under the same OPC node 9 1 3 AST Objects The alarming scheduling and trending AST objects are more complex than regular data points The OPC XML DA standard does not
224. lways internally connected to the FT port The schematic is shown in Figure 76 b IP 852 Channel FT or IP 852 Channel FT Channel a b Figure 76 a OPC server node on LINX 100 b OPC server node and and router on the LINX 101 If the OPC server shall only expose network variables from the local FT channel and there is no IP 852 backbone then the router is not needed In this case the user needs to commission only the OPC node To attach the FT channel to an IP 852 backbone the router in the LINX 101 needs to be commissioned See Chapter 8 for more information on the built in router and configuration server LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 83 LOYTEC 6 2 Data Points 6 2 1 Overview Data points are part of the fundamental device concept to model process data A data point is the basic input output element on the device Each data point has a value a data type a direction and a set of meta data describing the value in a semantic context Each data point also has a name and a description The entire set of data points are organized in a hierarchy At the data point level the specific technological restrictions are abstracted and hidden from the user Working with different technologies at this level involves common work flows for all supported technologies The direction of a data point is defined as the network view of the data flow This means an input data point obtains data from the ne
225. m tray right click on the bridge icon Io 3 Inthe context menu select Register new Server Shutdown 4 Inthe Register Server dialog click Add 5 A new server entry is added Enter the information on Server caption this is displayed Server name this is the COM object name and the Server URL the URL of the LINX 10X device as shown in Figure 143 Register Server p X OM Server parameter Server caption LInx 100 Server name LOYTEC OPC Server CLSID cDeEs8c44 5F3 1 444E BFO 39E 462020151 ML Server parameter Server URL nttp ti1 a2 168 24 99 04 LA Proxy User name operator Password SSE Min update rate 1000 msec wait time 10000 mzer Hold time fo msec Option fle Add Delete Ok Cancel Figure 143 Register Server dialog in the bridge software 6 Additionally enter the operator as the User name and its Password on the device 7 Click Ok 9 4 Using Custom Web Pages Version 3 0 Custom Web pages can also be developed for the LINX 10X For doing so the applications engineer must implement an OPC XML DA Web service client which adheres to the WSDL interface This can be done in C or script languages such as Perl The WSDL must be obtained from the OPC Foundation s Web site following the OPC XML DA namespace http opcfoundation org webservices xmlda 1 0 Any Web content including scripts applications or static Web pages can be stored directly
226. ment Please refer to Section 4 9 6 on how to enable or disable the Channel Timeout If an LNS based network management tool like LonMaker or NL220 is used on a network that has channel timeout enabled please install an NTP client program e g achron4 exe on this PC that synchronizes the PC clock to the NTP time Otherwise the PC clock and the clock inside the LINX 101 will drift apart and communication between the PC and the LINX 101 will terminate 8 7 2 Channel Delay Version 3 0 Channel Delay is an LNS channel property that specifies the expected round trip time of a message and its response This value is used by LNS to adjust the protocol timers in the CEA 709 nodes Please consult the documentation for your network management tool about the Channel Delay details LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 161 LOYTEC 8 7 3 Escrowing Timer Packet Reorder Timer The Escrowing Timer or Packet Reorder Timer is a CN IP channel property that specifies the amount of time the device will wait for an out of sequence IP packet to arrive This parameter is important in WANS like the Internet where packets pass many routers that can change the order in which packets arrive at the destination node The default value is 64 ms Do not use the Escrowing Timer in LANs since the packet order is always guaranteed in a LAN This will add unnecessary delays which negatively impacts the performance of your CN IP devices if a packet is lost or d
227. n Use Pollcycle as For input data points this property defines whether the input shall use a receive timeout or be constantly polling See Section 6 2 2 Pollcycle For input data points this property defines the pollcycle receive timeout in seconds Set this property to 0 to disable polling See Section 6 2 2 Poll on Startup For input data points this property defines whether the data point shall be polled once at start up Poll on startup can be enabled independently of the pollcycle See Section 6 2 2 Min Send For output data points this property defines the min send time in seconds See Section 6 2 2 Max Send For output data points this property defines the max send time in seconds See Section 6 2 2 Max Cache Age For output data points this property defines the maximum cache age in milliseconds See Section 6 2 2 Only notify on COV This property is valid for binary and multi state input data points It defines if a data point shall trigger an update only when the value changes or on every write If this 1s enabled consecutive writes with the same value do not trigger an update If you want to convey every write disable COV on the data point Persistent This property defines if the last written value shall be stored as a persistent value Persistent data points restore that value after a restart from the persistent storage See section 6 2 3 Datapoint Type This is the base data point type e g analog Dire
228. n a given functional block This must be a unique index in the functional block which identifies the NV after other NVs have been added or removed from the interface Local Remote NV Index This property specifies the NV index For local static NVs this 1s the NV index of the static NV For external NVs this 1s the NV index of the NV on the remote device Local Remote NV Name This property specifies the programmatic name of the NV For local static NVs this is the programmatic name of the static NV For external NVs this is the programmatic name of the NV on the remote device Local Remote Functional Block This property specifies the programmatic name of the NV For local static NVs one of the reserved functional blocks can be selected Local Remote NV Flags This property specifies the NV flags For local static or dynamic NVs the flags can be configured For external NVs these flags are only informational Remove NV Information For external NVs this property contains the information on the remote device and the NV selector on that device Remote Device ID For external NVs this property contains information on the remote device by listing the program ID and location string Remote Device Address For external NVs this property contains the CEA 709 network addressing information to access the node i e subnet node and NID Retry Count For external this property defines the retry count The default is 3 Repeat Timer
229. n click Ok In the command window enter the command line route add 192 168 1 254 SCOMPUTERNAME Then open your Web browser and type in the default IP address 192 168 1 254 E Device Info Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras 7 Qe 5 O z ix 2 P JO suchen 5 Favoriten Ca RB gt wj rel 2 Adresse 2 http 192 168 24 99 webui device infoldevice info DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as operator Wechseln zu Links amp Snaglt E General Info Product name LINX 101 Product code LINX 101 Firmware LINX 10x Primary Image Version 3 0 0 Build date Fri Aug 8 13 54 31 2008 Serial number 008701 80000001 C6866 Free memory 5757K 457K System temperature 43 7 C Supply voltage 15 8V CEA 709 unique node ID 80 00 00 01 C6 85 IP unique node ID 80 00 00 01 C6 88 Status Online Send Serice Pin Message CEA 709 application unique node IDs CEA 709 80 00 00 01 CB 87 Send Service Pin Message Device Info Config Statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout networks under control goahead WEBSERVER ma go 070 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TL ELI RMme A Figure 6 Example Start Screen Click on Config in the left menu You will be asked to enter the administrator password in order to change the IP settings Enter admin and select Login LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 20 LOYTEC
230. n server has started not The CEA 852 device has been registered but is not responding responding at the moment e disabled The CEA 852 device has been disabled on the channel or rejected No extended The CEA 852 device does not support the extended NAT NAT mode This device is disabled Table 7 Possible Communication Problems in the Configuration Server 5 2 9 Data Points Version 3 0 The LINX 10X s Web interface provides a data point page which lists all configured data points on the LINX 10X An example is shown in Figure 62 The data point page contains a tree view Clicking on a particular tree item fills the right part of the page with a data point list of that tree level and all levels below Thus one can get an easy overview of all data points LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 70 LOYTEC The data point list displays the data point name direction type current value and data point state Inactive points are displayed in gray If the data point list does not fit on one page there are page enumerator links at the bottom Data Points Microsoft Internet Explorer i Bl x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Q arik m T ix E TN JO suchen f Favoriten 2 w L4 rel n amp http 192 168 24 99 webui conFig lgtw dp bur Wechseln zu Links amp Snaglt E Adresse DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin ts oO Reload evice into d
231. n the projects list L Web Project Mame Project Size Project RAM Size New Project 0 00 kB 0 00 kB Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 171 LOYTEC 9 2 2 Start a Graphical L Web Design Note The L Web graphical design tool is started from within the L Web projects tab The graphical design for the L Web project is created in the L Vis design tool The data point configuration created in the LINX 10X configuration project is available for the L Web project and its graphical design To Start a Graphical Design 1 Select the L Web Projects tab 2 Select an L Web project 3 Click Design Graphics Projects Add New 4 This opens the L Vis graphical design tool Complete the graphical design in the tool and click the Download to Device speed button i amp New Project 1 LO TEC L Vis Konfigurator Datei Bearbeiten Modell Firmware Verbindung Format Werkzeuge Ansicht Hilfe iBag ve goco wu rm sex 5 The graphical design is now part of the project L Web Project Mame In Project Mew Project Project Size Project RAM Size 4 06 kB 40 60 kB If the Configurator had been connected to the device the graphical design would have been added to the device in the same step 9 2 3 Organize L Web Projects Version 3 0 L Web projects can be organized within the LINX 10X configuration project L Web projects can be part of the configuration project and or
232. nclosure dimensions in mm Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 26 LOYTEC 3 2 Product Label The product label on the side of the LINX 10X contains the following information see Figure 14 e LINX 10X order number with bar code e g LINX 100 LINX 101 e serial number with bar code Ser e unique node ID and virtual ID of each port NIDI VIDI with bar code e Ethernet MAC ID with bar code MACI Node ID of CEA 709 Port 1 Virtual Node ID of CEA 852 port Ethernet LOYTEC electronics GmbH NIDI MUBEUNNUNHUNNNU iN x 101 Date Code VIDA EVN OE ANNO AI FC 810000F 12A08 MACI QUMNONHLTLIUNUNIL UELLE OOOABOOFFAA1 MADE IN EC W44 2008 MAC address of EIA 852 Ethernet port ES s MEAE NI 006101810000F 12A07 Serial number of the device Figure 15 LINX 10X product label Unless stated otherwise all bar codes are encoded using Code 128 An additional label is also supplied with the LINX 10X for documentation purposes A virtual ID VID is a Node ID on the IP channel 3 3 Mounting The device comes prepared for mounting on DIN rails following DIN EN 50 022 The device can be mounted in any position However an installation place with proper airflow must be selected to ensure that the LINX 10X s temperature does not exceed the specified range see Chapter 16 3 4 LED signals 3 4 1 Power LED The LINX 10X power LED lights up green when power is supplied to terminals 16
233. nd select an alarm data point In the Mail Triggers list select the added trigger data point Mail Triggers Datapoint Type Critical Alarm Condition In the Manage Trigger Conditions list put a check mark on alarm conditions that shall invoke the transmission of the E Mail Manage Trigger Conditions Enabled Conditions e to Active bo Ackd Active 1 ta Ack Pending to Ackd to Inactive Change to the Common Mail Properties tab Add the alarm data point as a data source and insert the place holder into the E Mail text as described in Section 7 8 1 7 10 4 Create an Alarm Log Version 3 0 The alarm objects on the device contain an alarm summary live list of currently active and acknowledge pending alarms As soon as an alarm becomes inactive and has been acknowledged it disappears from the alarm summary To store a historical log of alarm transitions an alarm log needs to be created An alarm log can log transitions of one or more alarm objects Its size is configurable The alarm log is a ring buffer As soon as its size limit is reached the oldest alarm log records are overwritten by new alarm transitions To Create an Alarm Log l Under the Global Objects folder select the Alarm Log Object Configuration sub folder n Global Objects fl E Mail Configuration 0 Items Be y Math Object Configuration 0 Items Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items In the data point list r
234. ndar pattern by entering a Date Configuration Then click Add Entry The date appears in the Pattern Entries list on the right hand side Edit an exception by selecting the pattern entry in the Pattern Entries list Then modify the date configuration in the Date Configuration group box LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 136 LOYTEC Configure Pattern x Remove Selected Fattern Entries Pattern Mame Holidays Create Mew Pattern Entry Tip Date Date Configuration C Date Range Year Month uy Day 14 Preview 4 February 2008 M TW TF S if oi 30 31 1 Z 4588572883 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 1r 18 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 august 2008 SM TW TF S 1 2 345857 8 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1r 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 27 28 28 30 31 Man March 2008 hM TW TF S 1 223242587 8 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20 21 27 23 24 25 256 27 78 20 3D 31 hM TW TF S 12 345 8B Y 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2n 2 22 23 24 25 25 27 28 28 30 C Week and Day April 2008 SMTW TF S 12345 G6 7 8 910 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2D 21 22 23 24 25 20 27 28 29 30 M TW TF S 1234 5 58 7 8 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 27 28 20 30 31 Add Entry gt May 2008 Sok TW TF 8 12 3 450865 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 2D 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 5M TW TF S 1 23458578 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 18
235. ndows Vista The OPC Bridge software is available on the LOYTEC Software CD or via download from the LOYTEC Web site www loytec com For installing the software a registration code must be purchased To Install the OPC Bridge Double click on lopc br800 1 0 setup exe and follow the installation steps LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 173 LOYTEC 2 When asked type in the bridge s registration code Click Next 3 Finalize all remaining installation steps by clicking Next and Finish When the installation is complete the OPC Bridge software is available under Programs LOYTEC OPC Bridge 9 3 2 Configure the Bridge Locally If the bridge software is installed on the same PC as where the LINX 10X Configurator software is used to configure the LINX 10X OPC server the server information can be automatically made available as a COM OPC server This is done when the LINX 10X configuration is downloaded into the device To Configure the Bridge Locally L Open the Configurator software and configure the LINX 10X as described in Section 7 1 In the LINX 10X Configurator menu go to SettingslProject settings This opens the project settings dialog on the tab General as shown in Figure 141 Project Settings E B General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA709 cEAz09 as Project Mame Unnamed Project Default FTP Connection Settings Username admin Password admin O
236. ng CPs on the LINX 10X results in a file transfer The LINX 10X supports both the LONMARK file transfer and the simpler direct memory read write method In both cases however one has to keep in mind that a file transfer incurs more overhead than a simple NV read write Therefore polling CPs should be done at a much slower rate than polling NVs Another aspect is how CPs are handled by network management tools Formerly those tools were the only instance that could modify CPs in devices Therefore most tools do not automatically read back CPs from the devices when browsing them This can result in inconsistencies between the actual CP contents on the device and their copy in the network LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 125 LOYTEC management tool It is recommended to synchronize the CPs from the device into the LNS database before editing and writing them back To Synchronize CPs in LonMaker TE 1 Right click on a device object and select Commissioning Resync CPs from the context menu 2 This opens the dialog shown in Figure 115 Set Set Configuration Properties Properties Device LIMER 110 Hamels cancel l Help Operation C Download current values to device f Upload values from device Reset device to default values C Set device template defaults from device Figure 115 Set Configuration Properties in LonMaker TE 3 In this dialog select the radio button Upload values from
237. nnns 34 4 3 6 Option 6 CEA 852 client configuration RNI configuration 34 4 3 7 Option 7 CEA 852 server configuration ccceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 4 3 8 Option 8 Reset configuration factory defaults sssssse 35 ASO Option 9 Device SLIlISHOS o cer teste E nob ovde a 35 4 5 10 Opton 0 Reset Device iom de E chat OE to m HH ota ete aU tepida 35 2 3 L Option a Data POMS tenci tert leet ped tester Rech ete 35 4 4 System Configuration Menu ineo rese sees sepes odori see sie eaae s doses dri S pese 35 4 4 1 Option 1 Configure Date Time eeeesssssseeeeeeeeeeenn n 35 4 4 2 Option 2 Configure Earth Position esee 36 4 4 3 Option 7 FTP server 8 FTP server port eeeeeeee 36 4 4 4 Option 9 Web server O Web server port eeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 36 4 4 5 Option c E Mail Account Configuration cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 4 5 CEA 709 Configuration Men sissioni Love oio Parva eh Se exe kaaa ruasae iks 37 4 5 1 Option 0 Port conHguratiOTu uoa situe peores paie Een ed aba beue cO a ag es 38 4 5 2 Option r Router configuration sssseeeeeesesesseeeeeeeeeeeene nene 38 4 6 IP Configuration VIeni elei eee i re ee ri erii eres eei vr aeree eedvvevosi deseas 39 Z5 Optom be SUD TIC PR icem ad E tuit mre EU las NUR ues Uo us 40 4 6 2 Option 2
238. nsmitting device collects the CEA 709 packets before it transmits the CN IP packet over the CN IP channel Please refer to Section 4 7 7 on how to enable aggregation Note that aggregation adds a delay to the transactions but dramatically improves the throughput of your CN IP channel Use aggregation if you have a high channel load but can tolerate some additional propagation delay given by the aggregation time value 8 8 2 MD5 Authentication MD5 authentication is a method to verify the authenticity of the sending device Only devices that have MD5 enabled and use the same MDS secret can share information with each other If the configuration server has MD5 enabled only devices that have MD5 enabled and use the same MDS secret as the configuration server can join the logical CN IP channel Please refer to Section 4 7 8 and Section 4 9 9 for details 8 8 3 Dynamic NAT Addresses A common practice for Internet providers is to assign addresses on a per session basis to a client Each time a connection is established e g an ADSL link is set up the Internet Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 162 LOYTEC Version 3 0 provider may choose an IP address from a pool Since this address will be the public address of a NAT router the NAT address configured in the LINX 101 would need to be updated The Auto NAT feature in the LINX 101 permanently monitors the current NAT address When the LINX 101 detects a change in the NAT
239. nt connected to this port This state is referred to as overload condition A port overload condition occurs if e the average bandwidth utilization of this port was higher than 70 or e the collision rate was higher than 5 or e more than 15 CRC errors have occurred on a port with a power line transceiver or more than 5 on a port with a transceiver other than power line or e the LINX 10X was not able to process all available messages For a deeper analysis of the reason for the overload condition it is recommended to use a protocol analyzer e g LOYTEC s LPA or a similar tool The exact reason of the overload condition can also be determined with the LSD Tool 3 5 Status Button Version 3 0 The LINX 10X is equipped with a status button see Figure 14 When pressing the status button shortly during normal operation of the LINX 10X it sends a Service Pin Message on the active CEA 709 network port FT 10 or CEA 852 As an alternative to pressing the status button a service pin message can be sent via the Web interface see Section 5 1 The status button can also be used to switch the device back to factory default state Press the service button and power cycle the device Keep the button pressed until the port LEDs illuminate orange permanently Release the button within five seconds from that time on to reset the device to factory defaults Alternatively the device can be switched back to factory defaults over the console UI se
240. og UID csv data allog Alarmlogname UID csv The UID is the unique ID of the alarm log object The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list of the alarm log folder similar to obtaining the UID of trend log objects For a more user friendly listing of the files the Alarmlogname contains the alarm log s object name It is truncated after 23 ASCII characters to fit the requirements of the file system A trend CSV file for the alarm log object alarmlogO and the UID 100C would result in the CSV file data allog alarmlogO 100C csv The UID remains constant for the life time of the object even when the name is changed The CSV format of the alarm log CSV file is identical to the trend log CSV format as described in Section 10 1 2 10 2 CEA 709 Interface 10 2 1 NV Import File Version 3 0 Network variables can be imported to the LINX 10X Configurator in a CSV file The format of this file is described in this section The first line of the file must contain a comment starting with a hash character specifying the format version and import technology dpal_csv_config Version 1 Technology CEA709 After that line any number of comment lines starting with the hash character are allowed Lines that are not comments specify one NV per line using the column information as described in Table 11 The columns are separated by commas or semi colons Which separator is used can be conf
241. on the IP channel It either needs to contact a configuration server or a configuration server needs to contact the device in order to set up the proper routing tables Before a device can become a member of the IP 852 channel it needs to have proper IP settings see Section 4 6 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 152 LOYTEC e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 6 e Auto NAT or manual NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 6 e MDS secret if authentication is required see Section 4 7 Please consult Sections 4 6 and 4 7 on how to setup a CEA 852 device The L IP can be used together with the PC based i LON Configuration Server utility or with the built in configuration server If multiple CEA 852 devices behind one NAT router are added the Auto NAT setting in the CEA 852 devices 1s recommended to be used with the LINX 101 configuration server or an L IP configuration server Please refer to the following sections on how to setup the device and the configuration server If the Auto member feature is enabled in the configuration server the CEA 852 device can add itself to the IP 852 channel without explicitly adding the device at the configuration server Note that enabling auto member is a potential security hole since all devices can add themselves to the IP 852 channel 8 3 Configuration Server for Managing the IP 852 Channel 8 3 1 Overview Note
242. onnected to the RS 232 port of a PC via its console interface as described in Section 4 1 You will need the LOYTEC serial upgrade tool LSU Tool which can be downloaded from our homepage at www loytec com Please make sure that the LINX 10X console shows the main menu otherwise navigate to the main menu or simply reset the LINX 10X Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 188 LOYTEC To Upgrade via the Console 1 Double click on the dlc file that comes with the new firmware package This should start the LSU Tool and load the firmware image referenced in the dlc file Please note that the dlc file and the dl file must be stored in the same folder The start window of the LSU tool is shown in Figure 151 E LSU Serial Upgrade Tool 2 0 1 Figure 151 LSU Serial Upgrade Tool in Idle Mode 2 If the LINX 10X is not connected to COMI you can change the port to COM2 CONG or COMA Make sure that the product shown under Product matches the device you are upgrading Press Download to start the download A progress bar as shown in Figure 152 can be seen Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 189 LOYTEC El LSU Serial Upgrade Tool 2 0 1 Figure 152 Progress Bar during Firmware Download 3 If the upgrade is successful the following window appears Figure 153 Figure 153 Successful Firmware Upgrade 4 Double check that the new firmware is executed by selectin
243. ork LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 159 LOYTEC Note that all channel members must be configured with the same multi cast address and use the same client port 1628 is recommended Also note that multi cast addresses cannot be routed on the Internet They can only be used in a LAN or VPN environment If you configure multi cast there may be some devices which do not support this feature In this case the LINX 101 uses a hybrid scheme and sends unicast to those devices which are not configured for multi cast Note that the LINX 101 determines automatically when to switch to the multi cast mode depending what types of devices are in the channel and on the traffic burden for those devices As a rule of thumb multi cast is used when there are only switches repeaters in the channel and it is not used when there are only configured routers To detect if the LINX 101 s router utilizes the multi cast feature to send to other devices contact the Extended CEA 852 device statistics in the statistics menu Section 5 2 6 The entry Channel Routing Mode reads SL send list if packets are routed to the multi cast group It reads CR channel routing if the normal unicast method is employed Also the entry Multi cast packets sent in the CEA 852 device statistics menu Section 5 2 6 counts the number of multicast packets transmitted to the group If this item remains zero no multi cast is used by the LINX 101 8 6 Remote LPA
244. ote object features For remote schedulers and calendars nviSchedLink and nviCalLink NVs are created For alarm clients nviAlarm 2 NVs are created 10 2 8 Gateway Objects Version 3 0 The LINX 10X contains eight proprietary Gateway objects These are containers for all NVs which are configured on the LINX 10X s CEA 709 port They are intended for grouping NVs When static NVs are created they can be assigned to any of the eight gateway blocks When creating dynamic NVs in the LNS based tool the NVs should be added to the gateway blocks LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 185 LOYTEC 11 Network Media WAFT 00 The LINX 10X FT port is fully compatible to the parameters specified by LONMARK for this channel FT ports can also be used on Link Power LP 10 channels However the LINX 10X does not provide the power supply for Link Power channels When using the Free Topology Segment feature of the FT only one termination Figure 146 is required and can be placed anywhere on the free topology segment Instead of building the termination one can order the L Term module LT 33 from LOYTEC which can be used to properly terminate the bus 100 uF 50V E 2259 Q 100 uF 50V Figure 146 FT Free Topology Termination In a double terminated bus topology two terminations are required Figure 147 These terminations need to be placed at each end of the bus Here also L Term modules can be used at either end
245. own in Figure 9 Note that the device status is displayed as Configured on the right hand side below the speed button bar Click on the Scan Channel speed button marked by the red rectangle in Figure 9 to scan all NVs found on nodes connected to the LINX 10X s FT 10 channel Figure 10 shows an example result of the scan Now select the NVs which shall be exposed as OPC tags and click on the Use on Device speed button as marked by the red rectangle in Figure 10 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 22 LOYTEC hoy LOYTEC LINZ 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt i 2 E E n x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web lej x D hany t amp 8 E ple Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem lli Channel FT 10 Status Configured Online D atanpip Statistics zig Model Mo Joo Set Auto Datapoint Configuration Local datapoints Datapoint Mame Filter i Ts m CSV File 0 Items Mo OPC Direction f O Datapoint Name ae es 3 CEA709 LNS Scan 3 CEA709 Network Scan of CEA709 Templates E 2 LINX 100 j oan rn System Registers 9 Items User Registers 0 Items Elf CEA709 Port i Datapoints D Items Calendar 0 Items Es Scheduler 0 Items m Alarm B Items 71 Trend 0 Items 7 Statistics 18 Items La J Remote Devices 93 alabal Objects fl E Mail Configuration 0 Items seen je Math Object Configuration 0 Item
246. ows the IP configuration page with DHCP disabled while Figure 55 shows the IP configuration page with DHCP enabled The mandatory IP settings which are needed to operate the device are marked with a red asterisk IP address netmask gateway The Enable DHCP checkbox switches between manual entry of the IP address netmask and gateway address and automatic configuration from a DHCP server LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 60 Version 3 0 LOYTEC Hostname and domainname are optional entries and can be left empty For some DHCP configurations it may be necessary to enter a hostname Please contact your system administrator on how to configure DHCP to acquire an IP address Further you can configure up to 3 Domain Name Servers Currently these entries are not used Config IP Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Q nra X T ix a TN JO suchen Se Favoriten ee w L4 rel 33 Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webuifconfigiip EJ wechseln zu Links d Snagit Sj DLOYTEC Enable DHCP IP Address IP Netmask IP Gateway Hostname Domainname DNS Server 1 leave empty to disable DNS Server 2 leave empty to disable DNS Server 3 leave empty to disable MAC Address networks under control Alarm NTP Server 1 leave empty to disable NTP Server 2 leave empty to disable NTP Status Link Speed amp Duplex Statistics L Web Reset
247. r more information on the L Web refer to Section 9 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 164 LOYTEC Standard OPC clients and SCADA packages which shall visualize the LINX 10X s data points must conform to the OPC XML DA standard This means they must support the OPC Web service and not only the COM DCOM protocol If your SCADA package does not support OPC XML DA a PC based bridge from XML DA to the COM based protocol can be used The bridge software is running on a PC and translates from COM DCOM requests into XML DA Web service requests The system is depicted in Figure 138 OPC XML DA Figure 138 Using a XML DA DCOM bridge With the bridge configured to access a number of LINX 10X the COM based SCADA application can access a COM based OPC server for each LINX 10X The bridge software OPCBR 800 can be purchased and installed on any PC This is discussed in Section 9 3 Finally customers can create their own XML DA clients based on the WSDL for OPC XML DA Refer to Section 9 4 for more information 9 1 2 Data Points Version 3 0 The data point hierarchy as configured by the LINX 10X Configurator software is exposed to the OPC tag namespace by the LINX 10X This is done internally for all data points which are marked for OPC exposure 1 e have the OPC check mark set Folders are translated into OPC nodes Any of the data point classes analog binary multi state string and user are exposed as OPC tags Each
248. r s Manual 145 LOYTEC 4 In the Mail Triggers list the added trigger data point appears with the Fill Level condition E Mail Triggers Datapoint Type Condition TestTrend Fill Level 5 Change to the Attachments tab 6 Select the trend log CSV file of the trend object used as a trigger in the Attach File drop down box and click Add Attachments Attach File TestTrend_1014 cs z Remove Attachment Device File Path Add Datetime TestTrend_1014 csy jEmpjuid trend 1014 csv v 7 Chck Ok to complete the E Mail template configuration 7 11 6 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Trends Local CEA 709 trend objects supports trending multiple data points in all trend modes interval COV and trigger The enable data point is also supported All data points can be NVs registers or of any other technology There is no LONMARK object linked to the trend object Consequently trend data cannot be accessed over a LONMARK mechanism 7 12 Remote AST Objects 7 12 1 Remote Scheduler and Calendar Adding remote access to the configuration of a scheduler and calendar which is located on another device is done by creating remote scheduler and calendar objects These objects can be created from data obtained by a network scan or LNS scan To Create a Remote Scheduler 1 Execute a network scan as described earlier in this document The scan folder 1s filled with available schedulers Fh CEA7U9 Network Scan Elf a0000007das8
249. re created automatically they are usually placed in the base folder and can then be moved by the user to any of his sub folders Note that the folder structure described above cannot be changed by adding or deleting folders at that level 7 2 2 Data Point List At the top right a list of all data objects which are available in the selected folder is shown From this list objects may be selected including multi select in order to modify some of their properties A double click will select the data point if the dialog is opened for selecting data points The list can be sorted by clicking on one of the column headers For example clicking on the Direction column header will sort the list by direction Other columns display data point name NV name and SNVT The OPC column provides check boxes for each data point If checked the respective data point is exposed to OPC on the device Deselect the check box if a data points shall not be exposed to OPC Note that deselected data points do not add to the OPC tag limit New objects may be created in the selected folder by pressing the New button to the right of the list or via the New command in the context menu A plus 4 sign in the list indicates that the data point contains sub points These can be structure members for structured SNVTs Clicking on the plus lH sign expands the view For the alarming scheduling trending AST features there are columns which display icons for data po
250. rend log object The line log create has two fields specifying the date and time when this CSV log was generated The line log capacity has two fields the current number of log entries in the file and the log capacity Following are one or more lines of log item Each line specifies a trended data point The first field is the index the second the ID of the logged data point the third the data point name The data point name can be augmented by engineering units in square brackets Log entries in the CSV refer to the item index to identify the data point for which the entry was logged log csv ver 2 log device LOYTEC Product Code Firmware Version Device ID String log info Log ID Log Name log create YYY MM DD HH MM SS log capacity filled capacity log item index UID data point name units d HEHEHE HE After those lines any number of comment lines starting with a hash character are allowed One line contains the column headings Lines that are not comments specify one log record per line using the column information as described below The columns are separated by commas or semi colons If commas are used as a separator the decimal point must be a point If semi colons are used the decimal point must be a comma D Sequence Number 0 The log record sequence number This is the Source monotonously increasing sequence number which is unique for each log record The record type L
251. riii _ Alarm Time Type Priority Description Source Name NENNEN Calendar 7 Se eras spe ENFRENTE te Eee Alarm gt o 12 08 2008 20 45 01 ow limit o overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1 nvi itemp 10 000000 Ack Far 1 12 08 2008 20 44 11 high limit D Light Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 3lux 4000 000000 Statistics D Q 12 08 2008 20 44 01 high limit 0 Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp200 000000 C L Web Reset Contact Logout E E E nterne Z Figure 67 Alarm Summary Page Active alarms are highlighted red Inactive alarms which have not been acknowledged are rendered in green print Alarms that can be acknowledged have an Ack button Press on the Ack button to acknowledge the alarm Depending on the technology this and older alarm record will be acknowledged Acknowledged active alarms are rendered in red print Click on Reload to refresh your alarm list Inactive alarms that have been acknowledged disappear from the list To record historical information about those alarms the alarm log must be used See Section 5 3 7 for the alarm log Web interface 5 2 13 E Mail Configuration Version 3 0 The Web interface provides the E Mail configuration page to set up an E Mail account which is used to send E Mails The content and time when E Mails are sent is configured elsewhere The E Mail configuration page is shown in Figure 68 In the field for the outgoing e mail server enter the SMTP server of your Intern
252. rnet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Q arik T ix 5B DO suchen Se Favoriten Ol A wj L4 rel X Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webuiJstatistics cnip cc stat Wechseln zu Links amp Snagit E DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as operator O Clear all CEA 852 statistics Update all CEA 852 statistics Device Info 4 Config O Seconds since cleared 92528 Statistics CERET of clear GMT Mon Aug 11 19 19 59 2008 D No of registered members 2 NE 9 LT Packets received 12 x pelle g 5 LT Bytes received unknown Cam Tost N LT Packets sent lo W CEA 709 lt LT Bytes sent unknown m Scheduler O IP Packets sent 2 B Alarm Log lt IP Bytes sent B4 L Web D IP Packets received lo C IP Bytes received lo Reset IP Packets data sent lo IP Packets data received lo Contact LT Stale packets 0 RFC Packets sent 84 Logout RFC Packets received le Avg aggregation to IP f Avg aggregation from IP f1 UDP Packets sent 100 TCP Packets sent lo Multi cast Packets sent lo Session ID 0x3Bcac7f SNTP synchronized no Number of CR member infos Current channel routing mode CR Message alloc count o rei ff Mmm z Figure 70 Part of the CEA 852 Statistics Page 5 3 3 Enhanced Communications Test The Enhanced Communications Test allows testing the CEA 852 communication path between the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X and other CEA 852 devices as we
253. router the NAT router must have a fixed public IP address The LINX 101 with the CS also cannot use automatic NAT discovery In this case enter the NAT address of the NAT router manually in the IP configuration menu Auto NAT can no longer be enabled on an LINX 101 with a CS To diagnose possible problems in the NAT configuration with port forwarding use the enhanced communications test see Section 4 11 5 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 156 LOYTEC IP 192 168 1 100 1628 NAT 135 23 2 1 L IHX ae e Firewall NAT Router i et p Optional CS of the channel IP Channel m neal 135 23 2 1 192 168 1 1 IP 192 168 1 102 1630 Auto NAT 135 23 2 1 terne Forward ports 1628 and 1629 to IP address 192 168 1 100 forward 1630 to IP address 192 168 1 102 forward 1631 to IP address 192 168 1 103 L INX Wah amp amt FT 10 IP 192 168 1 103 1631 Auto NAT 135 23 2 1 ABE ad FT 10 Figure 133 Multiple LINX 101 devices behind a NAT Extended NAT Mode After the NAT router has been configured with the port forwarding settings and the CS has been turned on the channel members can be added This can be done either on the console UI or through the Web interface of the CS On the console UI add the devices to the channel in the configuration server menu 7 Choose a to add a device Enter the private address of the device in the
254. s ie Imt Alarm Lag Object Configuration 0 Items 1 LOYTEC Configurator ready E Figure 9 LINX 10X plug in main screen E LOY TEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt n ni x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web x JD HE MIESRE I U t Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem 1iflin Channel FT 10 Status Configured Online J Datapoint Configuration Remote Datapoints Datapoint Mame Filter J Imported lf CEA709 CSV File D Items Mo Direction Datapoint Name Remote Rv Remote De 4 5 In BS CEA4709 LNS Scan Wetn20Controller_invo00temp nwvo te SMVT temp tn2 EM D tn20 Datapoints 20 Items 1 CEA7U9 Network Scan CEA709 Templates lo LINX 100 ER 15 System Registers 9 Items 1 User Registers 0 Items m NY En2DContraller 1nvoDetemp f vo amp temp f SNVT temp f tozo Ei 7 CEA709 Port fas J Datapoints 0 Items e A Calendar 0 Items ooo Scheduler 0 Items 1 J Alarm B Items EU F Trend 0 Items nf Selected Datapoints a8 n i Statistics 18 Items in Datapoint Status amp Inactive Remote Devices 89 Global objects 223 May Cache Age ms amp Infinite 5 nf Datapoint Description Mf pn Math Object Configuration 0 Items fS Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items Remote Device in20 15 LOYTEC Configurator ready F iut Mv Enz cantroller inv v SM
255. s Table 12 shows the most important features available only in certain firmware versions Firmware Version Features OPC XML DA Server CEA 709 Network Scan UNVTs SCPTs Table 12 Available Features depending on Firmware Version Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 193 16 Specifications 16 1 LINX 10X 16 1 1 Physical Specifications Operating Voltage Power Consumption In rush current Operating Temperature ambient Storage Temperature Humidity non condensing operating Humidity non condensing storage Enclosure Environmental Protection Installation 16 1 2 Resource Limits Version 3 0 Total number of data points OPC tags User registers NVs static dynamic External NVs Alias NVs Address table entries LONMARK Calendar objects LOYTEC 12 35 VDC or 12 24 VAC 10 typ 3 W up to 950 mA 24 VAC O C to 50 C 10 C to 85 C 10 to 90 RH 50 C 90 RH 50 C Installation enclosure 6 TE DIN 43 880 IP 40 enclosure IP 20 screw terminals DIN rail mounting EN 50 022 or wall mounting 10000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 both ECS and legacy mode 512 15 in legacy mode 25 calendar patterns LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 194 Version 3 0 LONMARK Scheduler objects LONMARK Alarm Servers Trend Logs E Mail templates Math objects Alarm logs LOYTEC 100 max AST configuration size 384KB 100 total aggre
256. sable DNS Server 3 leave empty to disable MAC Address IV Use Factory Default DO GA BO 1 9A 4C NTP Server 1 leave empty to disable NTP Server 2 L Web leave empty to disable NTP Status out of sync Reset Link Speed amp Duplex Auto Detect Contact Get Settings Logout The entries marked with are required for proper operation Device Info Config E Mail Data Points B Scheduler Calendar Alarm O he C O UW D O C Un E pus O D Statistics zl tf Mere 7 7 7 Figure 8 Enter IP address and gateway 7 Press Save Settings and then reset the device by selecting Reset in the highlighted text This changes the IP settings of the LINX 10X 2 3 Configuration with LNS based Tools Version 3 0 This section describes a quick start scenario for the LINX 10X In this scenario network variables of nodes connected to the FT port shall be exposed as OPC tags As a network management tool an LNS based tool is used First install the LINX 10X Configurator Software from the setup exe This file can be downloaded from www loytec com In your LNS based tool register the LINX 10X Configurator as an LNS plug in Then open an LNS database and add an LINX 10X device using the device template which has been created for the LINX 10X LINX 10x FT 10 Configure the added device with the LINX 10X Configurator plug in This opens the data point manager screen of the software as sh
257. sages 0 Layer 2 received 0 Layer 3 received 0 Layer 3 transmitted 0 Transmit TX retries 0 Backlog overflows 0 Late acknowledgments 0 Collisions 0 Out buffers used 0 In buffers used 0 TCL active 0 0 TSPs used 0 TSPs deleted lt Q No TSP available O L Chip read error 0 L Chip write error 0 Slow mode used EO Active outgoing 0 0 Waiting outgoing 0 0 Blocked outgoing 0 0 Slow mode outgoing 0 0 Authentication failed 0 Authentication attempts 0 Missed preambles 0 Packet RCV interrupted 0 Long packets 0 Packet XMT failed 0 RCV butter full 0 RCV packet lost 0 unconfigured 0x02 Figure 44 CEA 709 Application Statistics LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 52 LOYTEC 4 11 4 Option 4 IP statistics A sample console output is shown in Figure 45 KKKKKKKKKKK INTERFACE STATISTICS KKKKKKKKKKKK KkKKKK loO KKKKK Address 127 0 0 1 Flags Up Loopback Running Multicast Send queue limit 50 length 0 Dropped 0 KkKKK etho KkKKK Address 192 168 0 2 Broadcast Address 192 168 0 255 Flags Up Broadcast Running Simplex Multicast Send queue limit 50 length 0 Dropped 0 Network Driver Stats for CS8900 rx ready len 50 rx loaded len 0 rx packets 931 tx packets 1455 rx bytes 78480 tx bytes 13627 rx interrupts 931 tx interrupts 165 rx dropped 0 rx no mbur 0 rx no custers 0 rx oversize errors 0 rx crc errors 0 rx runt errors 0 rx missed errors 0 tx OK 1
258. sday of a month When a scheduler is executing the schedule on the local device it is called a local scheduler Such a scheduler is configured to schedule data points and later its daily schedules can be modified When accessing the daily schedules of a scheduler which executes on a remote device the object is called a remote scheduler A remote scheduler has the same interface to the user to modify daily schedules A remote scheduler object can be used as a user interface for schedulers that execute on different devices Trending refers to the ability to log values of data points over time A trend log object is responsible for this task It is configured which data points shall be trended Log records are generated either in fixed time intervals or on change of value conditions Trend log objects can trend either local or remote data points The trend data is stored in a binary format on the device The capacity of a given trend log is configured The trend log can be operated in one of two modes 1 In linear mode the trend file fills up until it reaches its capacity It then stops logging 2 In ring buffer mode In this mode the oldest log records are overwritten when the capacity is reached How many data points can be trended in one trend log is limited by the underlying technology So are some of the log modes Refer to the technology sections for more information The E Mail function can be combined with the other AST features The
259. ssible over a specific technology A register merely serves as a container for intermediate data e g results of math objects Since a register has not network direction it can be written and read Therefore two data points are generated for each register one for writing the register output and one for reading the register input Version 3 0 To Create a User Register L Select the LINX 10X User Registers folder Elf LINK 100 oo System Registers 9 Items F1 ser Registers 0 Items Right click in the data point list and select New Datapoint in the context menu This opens the register creation dialog as shown in Figure 111 Create New Register X Datapoint Mame my register Register Mame Type Double Cancel Create Register Figure 111 Create a user register Enter a Datapoint Name for the register You may leave the Register Name blank to give the underlying register the same name as the data point Select a Type Available are Double Boolean or Signed Integer Click Create Register Two data points now appear for the register one for writing the register and one for reading the register as shown in Figure 112 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 127 LOYTEC User defined registers Datapoint M ame Filter e OPC Direction EHE Datapoint Mame Register Mame z M Qut mw register Write my register 1 v In mw register Read my register Double 4 of Point
260. stics L eb Projects es m Model No 00 Set Auto a Datapoint Configuration Imported Remote Datapoints g CEA7D9 CSV File D Items Mo Direction Datapoint Mame Remote NV Type Remote Device ool CEA709 LNS Scan B1 ou MV asiff zOds207CkrnwiDO switch nin swibch SNYT_switch aiff z d3207 E 8 CEA708 Network Scan Hz ot Mv Biff z d32 zCtrinin1 switch r1 switch SMVT switch aiffazn0da207 Ely Siff zod3en7 BH 3 ou My Biff z d32 7CkrinviD2 switch nviD2 switch SMYT switch amp 1Ff070d3207 wo Datapoints 18 It _ og See CG Ui E out Nv_S1FFOFOd3207Ctrinvi03_switch niga switch SMVT switch B1ff z d3207 Hf CEA7D09 Templates E LIN 100 EH 5 In Nv aeiFFazad3s2s zckrnvon4 swibch nwa4 switch SMVT swiEch amp iFFaz d3207 cal J System Registers 9 Items EH 5 In Nv aifFf az adses rctrnvons swibch nvo0S switch SMVT switch aiFFaz da207 A User Registers D Items EH 7 In Mv amp SifF r d32 rckrmeo n6 switch nyog switch SMVT swibch aifraz d3207 Be ee rae HH 8 In Mv Biff z d3207Ctrlnvo07 switch nwo switch SMVT switch eiff aza da207 a usi E 3 Ot Nw Biff z ds2 7Ckrinwi08 temp nwiD8 temp SMVT temp 61FF070d3207 nn alengar ems Mah RUIL Ma CCAD ol ee ee ma s L am CRIT Ll Datapoint Mame Filter oo J Scheduler 0 Items 4 lud m3 chan 42 m 7 Alarm 0 Items Datapoint N ame MV STHUUds20zCtrnvill8 temp vee 2 Trend D Items Datapoint Description
261. stored on the device For instance the configuration project may contain a number of L Web projects but for saving space on the device only one of them is downloaded on the device The L Web projects tab provides a number of tools to organize a set of L Web projects To Organize L Web Projects Connect to the device as described in Section 7 7 2 2 Select the L Web Projects tab 3 Click Detect Projects on Device This scans for all projects found on the device L Web Project Name In Project Mew Project Second Project Yes es 4 13 kB 40 94 kB Project Size Project ROM Size Projects marked as a green Yes in the In Project column are L Web projects which are part of the current LINX 10X configuration project Projects marked as a green Yes in the On Device column are L Web projects which are part of the current LINX 10X configuration project A red No identifies the L Web project to be missing in the project or on the device respectively LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 172 LOYTEC If you want to download an L Web project to the device which is missing there select the project and click Download to Device After the download the project appears with a green Yes in On Device L Web Project Mame In Project Mew Project Project Size Project RAM Size Second Project L web Project Name Mew Project Second Project If you want to remove the project from the current LINX 1
262. t that the schedule references To read the calendar referenced by the schedule use this item path and the Calendar item name to read the calendar XML document e EmbeddedCalltemPath string Read only const This is an optional tag If present it contains the item path to the embedded calendar object that the schedule references To read the embedded calendar referenced by the schedule use this item path and the Calendar item name to read the calendar XML document 9 1 3 2 Calendar Object The LINX 10X exposes the calendar objects to OPC XML DA tags Each calendar object is represented by a folder in the OPC name space In that folder the following OPC tags shall be available Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 168 LOYTEC e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains calendar It identifies this folder as a calendar folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the folder tag e Calendar string read write This tag configures the calendar The data type is string and the format is in XML This document contains the calendarCfg element as the root element e Caps string read only This tag contains the calendar capabilities The data type is sting and the format is in XML The XML document contains the calendarCapabilities element as the root element 9 1 3 3 Alarm Objects The LINX 10X al
263. t Max CRC Error Rate input analog 0 000000 normal CRC Errors input analog 0 000000 normal Missed Packet Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Logout Max Missed Packet Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Missed Packets input analog 0 000000 normal Packet Rate input analog 0 000000 normal Max Packet Rate input analog 8 000000 normal Packets input analog 143914 000000 normal x ie _ nene 7 Figure 62 Data point page The data point names are links Clicking on such a link opens a details page on that data point For output data points the user can also enter a new data point value as depicted in Figure 63 Clicking on the Set button writes the new value to the LINX 10X s data server Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 71 LOYTEC 43 Data Point Details Microsoft Internet Explorer E Bl x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ay Zur ck PE x1 a A _ Suchen Favoriten 3 M eS wj 4 U e Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webui config latw_dp_details dp 0x1Oeef8cOafolder 0x08 irst_dp 0 Wechseln zu Links Snagit Fe al DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin back Reload Device Info Config Path CEA709 Port Datapoints Name NY tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp Direction output Type analog Value pd Enter for invalid Status invalid value Flags Poll cycle D ms Min send time ms Max sen
264. tains this state It can re transmit the scheduled values as appropriate e g when rebooting The pre defined values are called value presets A value preset contains one or more values under a single label e g day schedules the values 20 0 TRUE 400 Which value preset is scheduled at what time is defined through a daily schedule The daily schedule defines the times and value presets in a 24 hour period A schedule typically contains daily schedules for the weekdays Monday through Sunday See Figure 77 for an example of a daily schedule Monday E po oo 00 pa T 1 HE Figure 77 Example of a Daily Schedule For some tasks the daily schedules on weekdays is sufficient However on some specific dates there may be exceptions to the regular week This can be implemented by using defining daily schedules for exception days For instance there may be a separate daily schedule for Holidays The exception days are defined through a calendar The calendar contains a number of calendar patterns Each calendar pattern describes a pattern of dates that define the class of an exception e g Holidays When a calendar is defined on a system the exception days are available in all schedules When a schedule wants to define daily schedules for some of the available exception days they need to be enabled in the schedule See Figure 78 for an example where Holidays is used Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics Gm
265. ted v Polled Sync Create External NV Cancel Figure 109 Create a new external NV 4 Select the device in the box Select a Device on the left hand side 5 Enter the properties of the external NV on that device starting with the local data point name the remote programmatic NV name the NV type SNVT and direction Note that the direction is the direction of the external NV on the LINX 10X Therefore the remote output NV nvoOO switch becomes an input on the LINX 10X Also enter the NV selector in hexadecimal and the NV index in decimal Choose the preferred addressing mode e g Node ID 6 Click Create External NV to add this NV to the data point list 7 The external NV now appears in the port interface definition as shown in Figure 110 For external NVs which are inputs to the LINX 10X adapt the poll cycle property to your needs Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 121 LOYTEC Local datapoints Datapoint M ame Filter Ma Direction a O v3 Datapoint Name Local Nw Remote NV 1 Qut mw external switch nvohy external External NV Allocation JPC Ld v intl MV Allocation i E temal NV nt Data Type Mo Structured a Figure 110 Manually created external NV in the port interface definition 7 7 11 Create User Registers User registers are data points on the device that do not have a representation on the network Thus they are not acce
266. tes LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 96 LOYTEC State Text For multi state data points this property defines a human readable state label for each state 7 2 4 CEA 709 Properties Apart from the common data point properties discussed in Section 7 2 3 the data points of the CEA 709 technology have additional properties Depending if a NV is local or external remote the properties may vary Version 3 0 NV Allocation This property defines how a data point shall be allocated on the device Choices are Static NV Dynamic NV and External NV If the allocation type cannot be changed this property is locked SNVT This property defines the SNVT of the NV e g lux 79 Invalid Value This property defines the invalid value for the NV If set this specific value will be interpreted as invalid in the data point If known by the SNVT the invalid value is filled in Otherwise the user can specify an invalid value CEA 709 Mapping Information This information is derived from the SNVT It defines how the NV contents are mapped to the data point NV Scaling A B C These are the scaling factors known from the SNVT table The scaling factors are applied to translate a raw NV value into the scalar representation of the data point Data Type This is the basic NV data type This is usually filled in from the SNVT definition Local NV Member Index This property specifies the NV member index withi
267. the LINX 10X shall expose see Section 7 7 7 Alternatively you can create external NVs manually see Section 7 7 10 Finally the configuration needs to be downloaded onto the LINX 10X see Section 7 7 12 It is recommended to save the complete configuration to a disk file for being able to replace an LINX 10X in the network LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 103 LOYTEC START Start the Configurator stand alone Section 7 7 2 r Upload configuration Section 7 7 3 i Import network variables from file Section 7 7 5 v Select NVs and use on LINX 10X Section 7 7 7 4 Create other external NVs manually Section 7 7 10 Download configuration to LINX 10X Section 7 7 12 DONE Figure 87 Basic design flow without LNS 7 4 4 Configure without LNS Using Bindings Version 3 0 The flow diagram in Figure 88 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to configure the LINX 10X without LNS 3 x In this scenario the LINX 10X will use static NVs and bindings The advantage of this solution is that the network load 1s minimized However the non LNS management tool must create bindings for the LINX 10X and update an existing network Start the Configurator in stand alone mode and connect to the LINX 10X via the FTP method see Section 7 7 2 In the Configurator import data points from a CSV import file see Section 7 7 5 Select the data points th
268. tings Enter a user name and password for the default FTP access This access method is used implicitly when connected via LNS and the device is accessible over IP For this implicit connection there is no dialog to ask for a username and password and the username and the default password from the project settings are used Automatically add downloaded device to the OPC Bridge This option is only available if the LOYTEC OPC bridge software is installed on the same PC If enabled The LINX 10X device a configuration is downloaded to is automatically added to the OPC server list in the bridge For more information on using the bridge refer to Section 9 3 The data point naming rules tab see Figure 83 allows specifying how data point names are automatically derived from scanned network variables The preview shows how names would look like when the check marks are modified LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 98 LOYTEC Project Settings x General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA709 cEAz09 AST Logican Select how the scanned datapoints name should be set v Add Application Device Mame v Add Functional Black Mame v Add Network Variable Name Preview Mv DeviceMame FunctienalBlackMame MvMame Figure 83 Data Point Naming Rules Project Settings 7 3 8 CEA 709 Settings The CEA 709 configuration tab as shown in Figure 84 allows configuring properties of the device s CEA 709 port The options are
269. tion 6 CEA 852 client configuration RNI configuration Depending on the CEA 709 configuration this menu item is used to set the CEA 852 client configuration or to set the RNI configuration The LINX 100 can be switched between FT mode RNI configuration is available or IP 852 mode CEA 852 client configuration is available The LINX 101 always provides the CEA 852 client configuration for the built 1n router In case of CEA 852 client configuration select this menu item to change settings like configuration server IP address device name SNTP server escrow timeout aggregation timeout MD5 authentication secret In case of RNI select this menu item to change settings like the communication port the device name the location string or settings concerning the MD5 authentication See Section 4 7 or Section 4 8 for details Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 35 LOYTEC 4 3 7 Option 7 CEA 852 server configuration The LINX 101 provides the CEA 852 server configuration menu Select this menu item to change the CEA 852 configuration server configuration settings like the channel name channel membership list the SNTP time server channel timeout MDS authentication See Section 4 9 for details The CEA 852 server can also be configured over the Web UI see Section 5 2 7 4 3 8 Option 8 Reset configuration factory defaults This menu item resets the LINX 10X to factory defaults See Section 3 5 for d
270. tion dialog as shown in Figure 148 FTP Connect En Device X Target Device Recent Connections Remove Hostname ar IP Address 192 168 24 100 User admin Password esee cael Figure 148 FTP connection dialog LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 187 LOYTEC 3 In the FTP connection dialog enter the IP address of the LINX 10X to upgrade and the FTP user name and password The default user name and password are admin and admin This can be changed via the Web interface see Section 5 1 and reset via the console UI see Section 4 10 2 4 Click on Connect 5 Select the menu Firmware Update 6 This opens the Firmware Update dialog as shown in Figure 149 Click on the button and select the firmware image linx_Ic3k_3_0_0_primary dl Firmware Update i Download Target Device 192 168 38 2 Firmware File T Apri hwLIME 1100firmwareMinx 11x 1 0 0 primary dl Progress Status Idle Figure 149 Firmware Update dialog of the LINX 10X Configurator 7 Click on Start Download 8 Observe the download progress When the download is complete the dialog shown in Figure 150 appears Figure 150 FTP download success dialog 9 Click Ok 10 In the Firmware Update dialog click Close 11 The device s firmware has now been successfully upgraded 12 2 Firmware Update via the Console To download the firmware via the console interface the LINX 10X must be c
271. top level data point to be persistent enables persistency for all sub data points Clearing it disables persistency for all sub data points 6 2 4 System Registers The LINX 10X provides a number of built in system registers They are present without a data point configuration The system registers such as the System time or the CPU load can be exposed to the OPC server By default all system registers are checked for being exposed to OPC To reduce the number of needed OPC tags you may deselect certain system registers which are not useful in a specific project System register can also serve as a testing setup for the OPC XML DA communication without a CEA 709 network configuration The System Time register is updated every second and may serve for testing subscriptions The Authentication Code register can be used to verify writing to OPC tags 6 2 5 User Registers Version 3 0 The LINX 10X can be configured to contain user registers In contrast to system registers these are only available as a part of the data point configuration User registers are data points on the device that do not have a specific technological representation on the control network Thus they are not accessible over a specific control network technology A register merely serves as a container for intermediate data e g results of math objects The register can have the following basic data types e Double A register of base type double is represented b
272. twork An output data point sends data to the network This is an important convention to remember as different technologies may define other direction semantics The basic classes of data points are e Analog An analog data point typically represents a scalar value The associated data type is a double precision machine variable Meta data for analog data points include information such as value range engineering units precision and resolution e Binary A binary data point contains a Boolean value Meta data for binary data points includes human readable labels for the Boolean states 1 e active and inactive texts e Multi state A multi state data point represents a discrete set of states The associated data type is a signed integer machine variable Each state is identified by an integer value the state ID State IDs need not be consecutive Meta data of a multi state data point includes human readable descriptions for the individual states state texts and the number of available states e String A string data point contains a variable length string The associated data type is a character string International character sets are encoded in UTF 8 A string data point does not include any other meta data e User A user data points contains un interpreted user defined data The data is stored as a byte array A user data point does not include any other meta data This type of data point also serves as a container for otherwise
273. upported The typical procedure in configuring the LINX 10X consists of the following steps 1 Select the data points of the network to be used on the LINX 10X e g select the NVs in the CEA 709 network nodes 2 Create necessary registers math objects 3 Select those data points on the LINX 10X which shall be exposed as OPC tags The CEA 709 NVs on the LINX 10X can be created in three different ways e Static NV For each selected NV on the network there is a static NV created on the LINX 10X This NV can be bound to the NV on the network Note that adding static NVs to the LINX 10X results in a change to the default XIF file The LINX 10X is assigned a new model number to reflect this change see Section 6 4 2 Static NVs are the way to use NVs in non LNS systems where NVs shall be bound instead of using polling e Dynamic NV For each selected NV on the network there is a dynamic NV created on the LINX 10X Compared to static NVs dynamic NVs do not change the XIF interface of the LINX 10X The dynamic NVs are created by the network management tool Currently only LNS based tools can manage dynamic NVs As for static NVs with dynamic NVs it is possible to use bindings instead of polling e External NV The selected NVs on the network are treated as external NVs to the LINX 10X The LINX 10X doesn t create any NVs on the device and instead uses polling to read from those NVs and explicit updates to send values Therefore no
274. uring which CEA 709 port is active in the LINX 10X Choose lt 1 gt for CEA 709 e g FT 10 or lt 2 gt for CEA 852 IP channel 4 5 2 Option r Router configuration This menu is only available on the LINX 101 The router configuration as shown in allows setting the principal operating mode of the LINX 101 routing core The default is configured router Choose 1 to change the router mode CEA 709 Configuration Menu 1 Router mode Configured Router q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 26 Router Configuration Menu Figure 27 depicts the router mode menu Choose 1 for configured router or select 2 for the Smart Switch mode Set router mode 1 Enable Configured Router Mode 2 Enable Smart Switch Mode Please choose Figure 27 Router Mode Configuration Menu 4 5 2 1 Option 1 Enable Configured Router Mode Default Select this menu item if you want to use the LINX 101 as a standard configured CEA 709 router that can be configured in a network management tool such as NL 200 or LonMaker This operating mode is also the factory default mode The LINX 101 must be rebooted to let the change take effect 4 5 2 2 Option 2 Enable Smart Switch Mode Select this menu item if you want to use the LINX 101 s router as a self learning router like the L Switch smart switch mode In this configuration the LINX 101 s router doesn t need to be configured with a n
275. uto Set This button may be used to let the configuration software decide on the best settings to use based on the current project Since the current projects resource usage LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 101 LOYTEC Note is taken as a starting point all schedulers and calendar patterns in the project should first be configured as required before this button is used e Set Defaults This button will choose standard values for all settings In most cases these settings will provide more resources than necessary It is possible to enter anything here until the project is actually saved or downloaded At this point in time the software will check that the resources configured here are sufficient to support the projects configuration If this is not the case this dialog will automatically open so that the settings may be adjusted 7 4 Workflows for the LINX 10X This section discusses a number of work flows for configuring the LINX 10X in different use cases in addition to the simple use case in the quick start scenario see Chapter 2 The description is intended to be high level and is depicted in a flow diagram The individual steps refer to later Sections which describe each step in more detail In principle the LINX 10X Configurator supports the following use cases e Network Management Tool based on LNS 3 x see Section 7 4 2 e Non LNS 3 x network management tool with polling see Section 7 4 3 e Non LNS 3 x
276. values of data points add data points to the Data Sources list by clicking the Add button 6 A data point selector dialog opens Select one or more data points and click Ok The selected data point appears in the Data Sources list Remove Data Sources Remove Datapoint Var nva current v1 7 Select the data point in the Data Sources list In the drop down box underneath select Selected Data Source Value and click the Paste to Text button selected Data Source value Paste En Text 8 A place holder v1 for the data point value appears now in the E Mail text 7 8 2 Trigger E Mails E Mail templates are used to assemble and transmit E Mails when certain trigger conditions occur For an E Mail template one or more trigger conditions can be defined The E Mail will be sent when one of the trigger conditions is activated Depending of the trigger data point type the trigger conditions can be refined Note that the behavior of the trigger data point is influenced by the COV properties of the data point If the Only notify on COV property is checked the data point triggers only if its value changes to the value of the trigger condition If that property is not checked the data point triggers on every write with a value that matches the trigger condition Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 129 LOYTEC The trigger for sending an E Mail can be enabled or disabled altogether by using an enable dat
277. verifies if sufficient resources have been configured If it detects a problem the user is notified to update the project settings The Auto Set feature automatically selects the right amount of resources 7 10 Local Alarming 7 10 1 Create an Alarm Server To generate local alarms an alarm server needs to be created at first The local alarm sources will report alarms to that alarm server The alarm server is the interface to access local alarms This can be done over the network or the Web UI To Create an Alarm Server Under the port folder select the Alarm sub folder to create an alarm server Elf CEA7U8 Port D Datapoints D Items a Calendar 0 Items olf Scheduler D Items 2 Right click in the data point list view and select New Alarm Server 3 In the Create New Alarm Server dialog box as shown in Figure 123 enter Name and Description of the alarm server Create New Alarm Server xX Name Critical Description Ciritical System Alarms a Figure 123 Create New Alarm Server dialog box 4 Click Create The alarm server appears now in the data point list view 7 10 2 Create an Alarm Condition To generate alarms from data points intrinsic reporting is used For each data point an alarm condition must be defined This condition employs an intrinsic algorithm to generate alarms based on the data point s value Depending on the data point type analog binary Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics
278. vice of the LINX 10X It is a measure for general network delay If the test to a specific member fails a text is displayed to describe the possible source of the problem The reasons for failure are summarized in Table 5 A warning Incorrect NAT configuration detected is displayed if the enhanced communications test determines that the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X is operated behind a NAT router but it has no NAT address configured In this case go to the IP configuration menu and configure the correct NAT address or set it to Auto NAT OK Return path not tested green Displayed for a device which is reachable but which does not support the checkmark feature to test the return path device sending to this CEA 852 device Therefore a potential NAT router configuration error cannot be detected If the tested device is an L IP it is recommended to upgrade this L IP to 3 0 or higher Not reachable not supported This is displayed for the CS if it is not reachable or the CS does not support red exclamation this test To remove this uncertainty it is recommended to upgrade the L IP to 3 0 or higher Local NAT config Error This is displayed if the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X is located behind a red exclamation Peer not reachable red exclamation NAT router or firewall and the port forwarding in the NAT Router usually 1628 or the filter table of the firewall is incorrect Displayed for a device if it is not
279. vilSley percent nwi 5lev percent SNVT lev percent En20 Controller 1 j User Registers 0 Items E CEA 708 Part Datapoints 0 Items In Mv Enz Contraller 1nvo 6bkemp F nvo 6temp F SMVT Eemp fF tnz Contraller 1 Qut Mv Enz Contraller 1nvit temp fF nvid temp_F SMVT Eemp fF tnz Contraller 1 In MV Enz Coentraller 1rmva 8switch nva 8swikch SMVT swiEch tnz Controller 1 Mv Enz Controller irnvitlsswitch nvitiaswitch SMVT swiEch tnz Contraller 1 D oc c cn R oco N NL m am El e p H Scheduler 0 Items olf Alarm D Items ll In MV En2 Controller 1nvol motor state nvol motor state 5MVT motor state En20 Controller 1 j Trend 0 Items i2 ut MV tn2oController_invilirmotor state nvillmaotor state SMVT motor state Enz Controller 1 die G Statistics 18 Items 13 In MV Enz Contraller 1nvaizamp nvaizamp SMVT amp tnz Contraller 1 oi Remote Devices 14 Qut MV En2 Controller 1nvil3amp nvil3amp SMVT amp Enzo m Global Objects 93 E Mail Configuration 0 Items Controller 1 4 MV th20Contoller 1rvati temp Datapoint Description Analog Datapoint vee WO math Object Configuration 0 Items ie fe Alarm Lag Object Configuration 0 Items 0 In DLOYTEC confignatorreadys t t tC lt 2 S lt lt lt iCi Figure 103 Scanned NVs in the LNS Database Scan Folder Figure 103 shows an example result of the database scan The list can be sorted by e
280. wer Supply Version 3 0 The LINX 10X can either be DC or AC powered The LINX 10X power terminals are listed in Table 3 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 30 LOYTEC ras 1 Earth Ground 16 17 Power Inputs 35 VDC or 12 24 VAC 10 Table 3 Power Terminals on LINX 10X Important Do not connect the power supply wire on terminal 17 to earth ground as shown in Figure 16 Terminal 16 may be connected to earth ground 3 8 Terminal Layout The LINX 10X provides screw terminals to connect to the network as well as to the power supply The screw terminals can be used for wires of a maximum thickness of 1 5 mm AWG12 Terminal Function CEA 709 A B of TP FT 10 Channel Port ie Ethernet 100BaseT 16 17 Power Supply do not connect 17 to Earth Ground Table 4 LINX 10X Terminals LINX 10X 3 9 Wiring The CEA 709 network segment connected to the LINX 10X needs to be terminated according to the rules found in the specification of the transceiver see Section 11 1 Important All Earth ground terminals are internally connected to the Earth Ground terminal 15 When using shielded network cables only one side of the cable should be connected to Earth Ground Thus the shield must be connected to earth ground either at the LINX 10X terminals or somewhere else in the network but never at more than one place see Figure 16 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual
281. wing 7 6 Replace a LINX 10X This Section describes how to replace as LINX 10X in your LNS database The description refers to LonMaker TE Let s assume there is a device linx in the LNS database as shown in Figure 95 Gateway 0 li Channel FT 10 Figure 95 LonMaker drawing with one LINX 10X To Replace a Device in LonMaker TE 1 Select the device and right click on the device shape 2 Select Commissioning gt Replace This opens the LonMaker Replace Device Wizard as shown in Figure 96 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 109 LOYTEC Figure 96 LonMaker replace device wizard 3 Choose the existing device template and click Next 4 Inthe following window shown in Figure 97 click Next Replace Device Wizard E Figure 97 Click Next without loading an application image 5 Then select Online as shown in Figure 98 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 110 LOYTEC Replace Device Wizard e El melude Hw ty Ae CES al Figure 98 Select online state 6 Select the service pin method and click on Finish as shown in Figure 99 Figure 99 Select Service Pin and click Finish 7 Then the service pin requestor opens Press the service pin on the replacement LINX 10X on the correct port You can also send the service pin using the Web interface see Section 5 1 Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 111 LOY
282. work the banner shown in Figure 46 is displayed WARNING Conflicting IP address detected IP address 10 125 123 95 also used by device with MAC address 00 04 5A CC 10 41 Clear IP conflict history y n Figure 46 IP Address Conflict Version 3 0 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 53 LOYTEC As useful information the MAC address of the conflicting host is shown If the information about this conflict shall be cleared hit y If n is selected the conflict will show up again the next time this menu is entered 4 11 5 Option 6 Enhanced Communications Test This menu item allows testing the communication path between the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X and other CEA 852 devices on the IP channel It tests the CEA 852 data communication This test can be used to determine if there is a working TCP IP connection as well as a working CEA 852 connection between the individual devices The test thoroughly examines the paths between individual members and the configuration server in each direction A typical console output is shown in Figure 47 Enhanced Communications Test Address Result RIT ms Comment 192 168 1 253 1629 CS OK 6 192 168 1 250 1628 OK 6 192 168 1 250 1631 OK 6 192 168 1 37 1628 FAILED n a Peer not reachable Figure 47 Enhanced Communication Test Console Output The round trip value RTT is measured as the time a packet sent to the peer device needs to be routed back to the CEA 852 de
283. ws 3 1 Otherwise please refer to the documentation of your network management tool on how to register an LNS plug in To Register in LonMaker TE 1 Open LonMaker and create a new network 2 Click Next until the plug in registration tab appears in the Network Wizard Select the LOYTEC LINX 100 Configurator 3 0 from the list of Not Registered see Figure 79 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 9 LOYTEC Note Version 3 0 Network Wizard x Plug in Registration p Pending Register l Not Registered l Echelon LNS Report Generator version 3 20 Deregister H Echelon LonhMaker XML Interface Version 3 20 C Gateway Configuration Utility version 3 0 1 BeLOYTEC LINX 100 Configurator version 3 073 LOYTEC AIF Builder version 1 4 07 j LP A ConvPlugin Yersion 2 23 j L is Configuration version 3 1 11 Enable Disable ORION Firmware Loader Version 1 0 E Already Registered j Echelon Londaker Browser Version 3 20 Disabled i Mot Installed Locally Skip this prompt when re opening this drawing Register all new plug ins when re opening this drawing Continue with advanced options Zur ck Messe Fertig stellen Abbrechen Hilfe Figure 79 Select the Plug in to be registered 3 Click Register The Configurator now appears in the Pending list 4 Click Finish to complete the registration Device templates for the LINX 10X are added automatically and XI
284. y an analog data point It can hold any scalar value No specific scaling factors apply e Signed Integer A register of base type signed integer is represented by a multi state data point This register can hold a set of discrete states each identified by a signed stats ID LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 85 LOYTEC e Boolean A register of base type boolean is represented by a binary data point This register can hold a Boolean value Since a register has not network direction it can be written and read Therefore two data points are generated for each register one for writing the register output and one for reading the register input A suffix is added to the register name to identify the respective data point For example the register MyValue will have two data points generated for MyValue Read and MyValue Write 6 2 6 Math Objects Math objects are advanced application objects that can execute mathematical operations on data points A math object takes a number of input data points variables vi vo Vn and calculates a result value according to a specified formula The result is written to a set of output data points The formula is calculated each time one of the input data points updated its value The formula is only evaluated if all of the input data points have a valid value i e don t show the invalid value status 6 3 AST Features 6 3 1 Alarming The alarming architecture comprises a numb
285. y compiled into the device When static NVs are used the LINX 10X changes its static interface and boots with a new one Each time the static interface of the LINX 10X changes i e static NVs are added deleted or modified the model number is changed The model number is the last byte of the program ID Thus a change in the static interface results in a change of the program ID and a new device template needs to be created in the network management tool A new device template usually means that the device has to be deleted and added again in the database All bindings and dynamic NVs have to be created again for the new device When the LINX 10X Configurator is connected via LNS it supports the process of changing the device template for the new static interface It automatically upgrades the device template of the LINX 10X device in the LNS database and restores the previous bindings and dynamic NVs If the LINX 10X is not configured with an LNS based tool this support is not available The new static interface is only available in a new XIF file or by uploading the new device template into the database For more information on the static interface and device templates please refer to the application note in Section 14 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User s Manual 90 LOYTEC 7 The LINX 10X Configurator This Chapter gives step by step instructions on how to commission LINX 10X create a data point configuration with input and output

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Rexel Pocket  Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 pSCマ] { =ロ ーつい り不完全燃焼防止  8x8 PDK-50HW3 Two-Way Radio User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file